contract documents andtownofgypsum.com/sites/default/files/gypsum lift station bid documents - text...

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

TOWN OF GYPSUM WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

LIFT STATION UPGRADE

FOR

Town of Gypsum P. O. Box 130

Gypsum, CO 81637 (970) 524-7688

Prepared by: Zancanella and Associates, Inc.

Engineering Consultants 1011 Grand Avenue

Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 (970) 945-5700

May 2018



INDEX TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

INVITATION TO BID INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID FORM WITH BID SCHEDULE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER LISTING SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING BID BOND AGREEMENT PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND PAYMENT BOND NOTICE OF AWARD NOTICE TO PROCEED NOTICE OF FINAL PAYMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS (Bound separately)

Z:\93503\93503.56 Wastewater\Lift Sta at Headwks\bid docs for station upgrade\Final bid set\boilerplate\Lift Station INVITATION TO BID (Autosaved).docx

INVITATION TO BID

TOWN OF GYPSUM WASTEWATER TREATMENT

PLANT LIFT STATION UPGRADE

Engineer: Zancanella and Associates Inc. Owner: Town of Gypsum, Colorado

Sealed bids will be received by the Town of Gypsum at, 50 Lundgren Boulevard, Gypsum, Colorado, until 2:00 PM local time on June 7, 2018. Bids received after this time will not be accepted and will be returned unopened. All bids that have been duly received will be opened publicly and read aloud. All interested parties are invited to attend. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive irregularities or informalities in any bid.

The work to be performed generally includes the construction of an upgrade to the Town of Gypsum Wastewater Treatment Plant Main Lift Station. This will include the partial demolition of the existing building as necessary for the construction of the building addition and new roof structure. Work will also include the installation of a new duplex pump skid (supplied by others) and all necessary piping to connect the new pump intake piping to the existing wet well and to connect the new pump discharge piping to the existing manhole adjacent to the building site. Piping work will also include all piping additions and revisions to reroute/replace the intake and discharge piping from the existing dual pump skid. Work will include the construction and installation of all other related mechanical and electrical equipment necessary for a complete and properly functioning lift station. Electronic copies of the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents for use in preparing Bids may be obtained at www.townofgypsum.com after May 11, 2018. Hard copies may be purchased from the Engineer with a payment of $50.00 for each set of Contract Documents. All payments made for Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents are nonrefundable. Contact: Matt Weisbrod Jim Hancock [email protected] [email protected] Zancanella and Associates, Inc. Town of Gypsum 1011 Grand Avenue PO Box 130 Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 Gypsum, CO 81637 (970) 945‐5700 (970) 524-1728 Each Bidder shall file with his Bid a cashier’s check, or a Bid Bond, in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.

The Bidder to whom a Contract is awarded will be required to furnish a Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond guaranteeing faithful performance.

http://www.townofgypsum.com/

mailto:[email protected]


2

A mandatory Prebid Conference will be held at Town Hall, 50 Lundgren Boulevard, on May 24, 2018 at 1:00 PM. Bids will be considered only from Bidders who have attended the Prebid Conference. Bids from Bidders not indicated in the Engineer’s records to have been in attendance at the Prebid Conference will be returned unopened.

OWNER By James L. Hancock, Town Engineer

Z:\93503\93503.56 Wastewater\Lift Sta at Headwks\bid docs for station upgrade\Final bid set\boilerplate\Lift Station INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.docx

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1. DEFINED TERMS

1.1 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term “Successful Bidder” means the most qualified, responsible responsive Bidder to whom Owner (on the basis of Owner’s evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award.

PART 2. COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

2.1 Complete copies of the Drawings and Project Specifications for use in preparing Bids may be obtained electronically from the Engineer. Hard copies may be purchased. All payments for Contract Documents are non-refundable.

2.2 No partial sets of Contract Documents will be issued. Complete sets of Contract Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Contract Documents.

2.3 Owner and Engineer will make copies of Contract Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work only and do not confer a license or grant for any other use.

PART 3. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

3.1 Each Bidder must be prepared to submit written evidence of his qualifications to perform the Work as set forth in Part 16 of this Instructions to Bidders. Bidders may be required to submit evidence that they have a practical knowledge of the particular Work bid upon, and that they have the financial resources to complete the proposed Work. In determining the Bidder’s qualifications, the following factors will be considered: work previously completed by the Bidder and whether the Bidder (a) maintains a permanent place of business, (b) has adequate plant and equipment to do the Work properly and expeditiously, (c) has the financial resources to meet all obligations incident to the Work, and (d) has appropriate technical experience. Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former work so that no just claims are pending against such work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is engaged in any work which would impair his ability to perform or finance this Work.

PART 4. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; VISIT SITE

4.1 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder must (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; (c) familiarize himself with Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work; (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder’s observations with the Contract Documents; and (e) attend the Pre-Bid conference and site visitation described in Part 6 herein. Bidders are instructed to bid documents AS-IS. Mistakes that are present in bid documents shall be forwarded to Engineer in a timely manor; at which point the Engineer will issue an Addendum, addressing all questions and comments.

Engineer: Owner: Zancanella and Associates, Inc. P. O. Box 1908, 1011 Grand Avenue Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 (970) 945-5700

Town of Gypsum P. O. Box 130 Gypsum, Colorado 81637 (970-524-1728

2

4.2 Reference is made to the Soil Investigation Data for the identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or which may otherwise affect the cost, progress or performance of the Work, and which have been relied upon by the Engineer in preparing the Drawings and Specifications.

Copies of such reports, if any, may be physically attached to or bound with the Contract Documents for the Bidder’s convenience but are not incorporated within or to be interpreted to constitute a part of the “Contract Documents”. Neither Owner nor Engineer makes any representation or warranty concerning such reports.

4.3 On request, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such investigations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of its Bid.

4.4 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way for access thereto, and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work, are identified in the Supplementary Conditions, Specifications, or Drawings.

4.5 Access to the site may be arranged through the Owner by contacting Jeff Shreeve, Public Works Director, at (970) 524-3127. Site access will be limited to normal working hours and to pre-arranged times.

4.6 The successful Bidder will be responsible for calling for all applicable locates that apply to the project site.

4.7 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that it has complied with every requirement of this Article 4 and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work.

PART 5. INTERPRETATIONS

5.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be submitted to Engineer in writing. Replies will be issued only by Addenda. Questions received less then five (5) days prior to the date of opening of Bids will not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the Contract Documents. No Addenda will be issued later than three (3) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum, if necessary, postponing the date for receipt of Bids or withdrawing the request for Bids.

5.2 All Addenda to the Contract Documents shall be properly acknowledged in the space provided on the Bid Form.

PART 6. PRE-BID CONFERENCE (MANDATORY FOR BIDDING)

6.1 A mandatory Pre-Bid conference will be conducted by Owner and Engineer at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to answer questions. Any questions which, in the opinion of the Engineer, cannot be answered by direct reference to the Contract Documents will be answered by formal written Addenda as outlined above under Part 5.

The Pre-Bid conference will include a tour of the site of the Work, conducted by representatives of Owner and Engineer. All interested parties are invited and required to attend.

PART 7. BASIS OF BIDS

7.1 The Bidder shall submit bids for all alternates, if any, listed on the Bid Form, as required by the Bid Form.

3

PART 8. BID SECURITY

8.1 Bid security shall be made payable to Owner, in an amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder’s maximum Bid Price, including alternates, if any, and in the form of a Cashier’s Check or a Bid Bond on the form attached issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. Submission of a Bid will constitute an agreement on the part of the Contractor and its Surety, if any, with the Owner that: (i) 5% of the Bidder’s maximum Bid Price, including alternates, if any, is a reasonable estimate of the presumed actual damages the Owner would suffer as a result of Contractor’s failure to enter into the Agreement and deliver the required Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond; (ii) it is difficult to ascertain the amount of actual damages to the Owner that would result from a breach; and (iii) the amount of 5% of the Bidder’s maximum Bid Price, including alternates, if any, shall be liquidated damages.

8.2 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond, whereupon it will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond within ten (10) days of the notice of award, or in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into such Agreement and furnish such Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond, if the Successful Bidder fails to pay to Owner the difference between such Bid amount and such larger amount for which Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by such Bid, then Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited to the extent of such difference. The Bid security of any Bidder whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of the seventh day after the “Effective Date of Agreement” (which term is defined in the General Conditions) or the sixty-first day after the Bid opening. Bid security of other Bidders will be returned within seven (7) days of the Contract award.

PART 9. CONTRACT TIME

9.1 The number of days within which, or the date by which, the Work is to be completed (the Contract Time) is set forth in the Bid Form (or if left blank, is to be filled in by the Bidder) and will be included in the Agreement.

PART 10. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

10.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Bid Form and the Agreement.

PART 11. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

11.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be executed with the Successful Bidder on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the “Effective Date of the Agreement”. The procedure for submittal of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the General Conditions which are supplemented in the Supplementary Conditions.

4

PART 12. SUBCONTRACTORS

12.1 The Bid Form requires that Bidder identify certain Subcontractors and other persons and organizations to be submitted as part of the Bid. The apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within seven (7) days after the date of the Bid opening submit to Owner a list of all Subcontractors and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of material and equipment) proposed for those portions of the Work as to which such identification is so required. Such list shall be accompanied by a written statement of qualifications including financial data, a summary of previous experience, previous commitments and evidence of authority to conduct business in Colorado. If Owner or Engineer after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, other person or organization, either may (before giving the Notice of Award) request the apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Bid Price. If the apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any substitution, the contract shall not be awarded to such Bidder, but declining to make any such substitution will not constitute grounds for sacrificing Bid security by such Bidder. Any Subcontractor, other person or organization so listed, and to whom Owner or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award, will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

12.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, other person or organization against whom the Bidder has reasonable objection.

PART 13. BID FORM

13.1 A copy of the Bid Form are included herewith; additional copies may be obtained from Owner or Engineer.

13.2 Bid Forms must be completed in ink or be typewritten. The Bid Price of each item on the form must be stated in words and numerals; in case of a conflict, words will take precedence.

13.3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature.

13.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature.

13.5 Bids by joint ventures shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by an authorized agent of each participant.

13.6 The names of all persons signing Bids must also be legibly printed or typed below the signature. A Bid by a person who affixes to his signature the word “president”, “secretary”, “agent” or other designation without disclosing his principal may be held to be the Bid of the individual signing. Evidence of the authority of the person signing shall be furnished.

13.7 The full name of each person or company interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form.

13.8 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall be inserted on the Bid Form.

13.9 No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefor, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, Owner may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed. No alteration in any Bid, or in the form on which it is submitted, shall be made after the Bid has been submitted.

13.10 The address to which communications regarding the Bid are to be directed must be shown.

5

PART 14. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER LISTING

14.1 Each Bidder shall list on the form provided the name of the manufacturers or suppliers of the items of equipment and systems listed on the form which he proposes to furnish. Upon the award of a contract, the named equipment shall be furnished. Substitutions will be permitted only if named equipment does not meet the specifications or the manufacturer is unable to meet delivery requirements of the construction schedule.

14.2 Preliminary acceptance of equipment listed by manufacturer’s name shall not in any way constitute a waiver of the specifications covering such equipment; final acceptance will be based on full conformity with the specifications covering the equipment.

14.3 Failure to furnish all information requested may be cause for rejection of the Bids.

PART 15. SUBMISSION OF BIDS

15.1 Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be included in an opaque, sealed envelope addressed to Owner and identified on the outside with the Bidder’s name and address and with the words “Bid for WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT LIFT STATION UPGRADE”.

15.2 Each Bid shall be accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents.

15.3 If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation “BID ENCLOSED” on the face thereof.

15.4 Bids shall be deposited in the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or the modified time and date indicated by addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids.

15.5 Oral, telephone, or telegraph Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association.

PART 16. POST BID/PRE AWARD SUBMITTALS

16.1 The three low Bidders identified by Owner may be required to submit the following information by hand delivery to Engineer on the day following the Bid opening:

A. List of a minimum of five recent similar projects the Contractor has performed.

B. Copies of the most recent financial statements of all listed Subcontractors included in the Bid submittal.

C. List of Engineers and Superintendents to be used on this project for the Contractor and all listed Subcontractors. Provide resumes and recent projects for all of the above.

D. Names and telephone numbers of a minimum of five references on similar work for the Contractor and all listed Subcontractors.

E. Names, relevant experience, and position of individual who will perform site surveying if not a licensed Surveyor.

16.2 The low Bidder will be required to provide a Town of Gypsum License number for the Bidder and all listed Subcontractors prior to Notice of Award. (Electrical and plumbing subcontractors are exempt from Town of Gypsum Licenses, and therefore do not need to submit any additional information.)

6

16.3 The above information must be available at the time and place indicated to be considered in further evaluation, and therefore, all Bidders are recommended to compile this data prior to submitting their Bids.

PART 17. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

17.1 Bids submitted early may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place and prior to the time designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or be by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder must have been mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids; the notice shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of original or modified Bid Price. Bids may also be modified or withdrawn in person by the Bidder or an authorized representative provided he can prove his identity and authority. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.

17.2 If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of his Bid, that Bidder may withdraw his Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, the Bidder will be disqualified from further Bidding on the Work. No right to claim mistake shall exist for Bidder following this twenty-four (24) hour period.

PART 18. OPENING OF BIDS

18.1 Bids will be opened publicly and read aloud.

PART 19. BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN

19.1 All Bids shall remain open for sixty (60) days after the date of the Bid opening, but Owner may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to that date.

PART 20. AWARD OF CONTRACT

20.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all formalities and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, non-responsive or conditional Bids. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.

20.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner shall consider the qualifications of the Bidders and whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements and alternates (if any are accepted) in the order in which they are listed on the Bid Form, but Owner may accept alternates in any order or combination.

20.3 Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of material or equipment) proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors and other persons and organizations must be submitted as provided in the Bid Form. Operating costs, maintenance considerations, performance data and guarantees of materials and equipment may also be considered by Owner.

20.4 Owner may conduct such investigations as it deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders, the proposed Subcontractors and other persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner’s satisfaction within the prescribed time.

20.5 Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not pass any evaluation to Owner’s satisfaction within the prescribed time.

7

20.6 If the Contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within sixty (60) days after the date of the Bid opening.

PART 21. PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND WARRANTY BOND

21.1 The General Conditions set forth Owner’s requirements for the Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond. When the Successful Bidder delivers the copies of the executed Agreement to owner, it shall be accompanied by the required Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond.

Z:\93503\93503.56 Wastewater\Lift Sta at Headwks\bid docs for station upgrade\Final bid set\boilerplate\Lift Station Bid Form.docx

BID FORM

To: OWNER: PROJECT: Town of Gypsum

P. O. Box 130 Gypsum, Colorado 81637 (970-524-1728

Wastewater Treatment Plant, Lift Station Upgrade

THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER, having familiarized himself with the Work required by

the Contract Documents, the site where the Work is to be performed, local labor conditions and all laws, regulations and other factors affecting performance of the Work, and having satisfied himself of the expense and difficulties attending performance of the Work,

HEREBY PROPOSES AND AGREES, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into Agreement in the form attached, to perform all Work, including the assumption of all obligations, duties and responsibilities necessary to the successful completion of the Agreement and the furnishing of materials and equipment required to be incorporated in and form a permanent part of the Work, tools, equipment, supplies, transportation, facilities, labor, superintendence and services required to perform the Work; and Bond, insurance and submittals; all as indicated or specified in the Contract Documents to be performed or furnished by Contractor in accordance with the following Bid prices (Contractor must submit on Base Bid and Bid Alternates, if any, to be considered).

A. BASE BID PRICE: _________________________________________ Dollars ($_____________).

B. BID PRICE ALTERNATIVE: Add/deduct the following to/from above base bid for adding/deleting (describe addition or deletion): ______________________________ Dollars ($_____________).

The undersigned Bidder agrees to furnish the required Bond and enter into Agreement within TEN (10) days after acceptance of this Bid, and further agrees to complete all Work covered by the Bid, in accordance with specified requirements and in accordance with the following schedule (Bidder to enter number of days after date of Notice to Proceed for all of the following, unless number of days has already been entered):

1. Startup of all Major Equipment Days 2. Substantial Completion (Ready for Punchlist) Days 3. Punchlist Complete Days

2

Liquidated Damages. Owner and Contractor recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not substantially completed within the time specified above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by the Owner if the Work is not substantially completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay Owner in accordance with the following:

1 Late Startup of all major Equipment $ 100.00 Per Day 2. Late Substantial Completion

$ 100.00 Per Day

(Ready for Punchlist) 3. Late Punchlist Completion $ 100.00 Per Day

Receipt of copies of the following addenda is hereby acknowledged.

Addendum No. Bidder’s Signature Date Acknowledged

Enclosed herewith is the required Bid Security, in the form of Cashier’s Check/Bid Bond (strike one), in the amount of ________________________________________________ Dollars ($_____________) which the undersigned Bidder agrees is to be forfeited to and become the property of owner, as liquidated damages, should this Bid be accepted and he fails to enter into Agreement in the form prescribed and to furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days, but otherwise the Bid security will be returned upon Bidder signing the Agreement and delivering the Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond.

In submitting this Bid, it is understood that Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and it is understood that this Bid may not be withdrawn during a period of sixty (60) days after the scheduled time for the receipt of Bids.

The undersigned Bidder hereby certifies (a) that this Bid is genuine and is not made in the interest of, or in the behalf of, any undisclosed person, firm, or corporation, and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation; (b) that he has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to put in a false or sham Bid; (c) that he has not solicited or induced any person, firm, or corporation to refrain from bidding; and (d) that he has not sought by collusion to obtain for himself any advantage over any other Bidder or over the Owner.

3

The full names and addresses of parties interested in this Bid as principals are as follows: Name Address

Item No.

Estimated Quantity Unit Description and Unit Price in Words Unit Price Total Price

1 L.S. Mobilization, including any and all equipment necessary to complete project, (this item amount can not exceed 5 percent of total bid), lump sum.

(Lump Sum Price - Words)

2 L.S. Exterior 12" and 8" HDPE discharge piping installation including excavation, bedding, backfill, compaction, tracer wire, boring connections to discharge manhole near building, complete and installed per plan, also includes all miscellaneous exterior piping and conduits, complete and in place, lump sum.


3 L.S. Concrete placement and backfill for construction of foundation for building addition, including excavation, backfill, footings, walls, floors, connections to existing concrete, saw cut demolition, boring of existing concrete, below slab conduit, floor drain and water service complete and in place per plans, lump sum.


4 L.S. Construction of walls and roof for building addition, including all materials such as framing, siding, drywall, roofing, insulation, doors, and all other items necessary for a complete and functioning building structure, complete and in place, per lump sum.

(Unit Price - Words)

5 L.S. Necessary removal of existing intake piping and installation of new intake piping from wet well to both existing and new pump skids, including excavation, concrete boring, supply and fusing of pipe, and supports and sealing of wall penetrations, complete and in place, lump sum.


6 L.S. Installation of new pump skid (as supplied by others), including unloading, placing in building, leveling, grouting, installation of natural gas fuel supply, bubbler and drain piping to wet well, exhaust piping, and mechanical assembly and alignment as necessary for proper use, complete and in place, lump sum.


BID SCHEDULE PROPOSAL

Gypsum Wastewater Treatment Plant

May 10, 2018Lift Station Upgrade

B3-1

Item No.





7 L.S. Construction, installation, and modifications necessary for the electrical work as described on the electrical plans, including building electrical service, changes and verification of panels and circuits, removal of unused equipment, and all other electrical work per plans, complete and in place, lump sum.


8 L.S. Interior construction and installation of all discharge piping associated with the new pump skid and associated with the modifications to the discharge piping for the existing pump skid, including installation of all necessary fittings, valves, flow meters, piping supports, and all necessary appurtenances for complete functioning discharge piping from the respective pump skids to the exterior of the building, complete and in place, lump sum.


9 L.S. Management of wastewater, including preparation of a construction sequence and emergency action plan to keep wastewater flowing to the wastewater treatment plant at all times without interruption; may include separate bypass pumping, and MUST include adequate backup pumping available at all times; complete, lump sum. (See Technical Specifications Section 02530.)


10 L.S. Excavation, backfill, compaction, procurement, and installation of precsast "Big Block" walls including bedding, backfill, compaction, grading, foundation preparation, leveling, wall drain, plus related driveway drainage system, complete and in place, lump sum.


11 L.S. Miscellaneous site grading and preparation, including, site grading, driveway preparation and surface, misc. removals and disposals, final grading and driveway surfacing, other misc. site preparation; complete and in place, lump sum.


12 L.S. As built survey of project once project has been completed, including gravity sewer and manhole inverts and rims, site grading, location of all site features, building dimensions and features; complete and in place, lump sum.


B3-2

Item No.





13 L.S. Testing of HDPE lines; complete and in place, lump sum.


14 L.S. All work associated with cutting and tie in at new headworks manhole, pipe plugging and removing the old headworks manhole after tie in, grouting and final connection at new headworks manhole; complete and in place, lump sum.


15 L.S. All work associated with providing the final connection for the electrical conduits from the new manholes to the lift station and sewer plant, including all pipe, boring, excavation, placement, fittings, pulling of fiber cable and termination at both buildings; complete and in place, lump sum.


16 L.S. Removal of existing miscellaneous piping not under other item numbers, including excavation, plugging pipe, grouting holes in walls, and disposal of materials removed; complete, lump sum.


17 L.S. All exterior work on the existing building including trim, exterior finishing, stucco and patching and finishing of transition areas from existing building to new building addition, per plans and finish schedule, complete, lump sum.


18 L.S. All required painting, including interior and exterior of building, process piping, and other equipment as called out on plans, complete, lump sum.


TOTAL ALL ITEMS ABOVE

B3-3

4

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER

If an Individual: [signature]

Print or type name: Doing business as: Date:

If a Partnership: By: [signature] General Partner Print or type name: Date:

If a Corporation:

(a Corporation)

By: [signature] Print or type name: Title: Date:

(S E A L)

ATTEST: Title:

5

If Bidder is a joint venturer, all venturers or their authorized agents must sign below.

Name of Joint Venture:

If Joint Venture is:

An Individual: [signature] Print or type name: Doing business as: Date:

A Partnership: By: [signature] General Partner Print or type name: Date:

A Corporation:

(a Corporation) By: [signature] Print or type name: Title: Date:

(S E A L)

ATTEST: Title:

6

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER LISTING

The following information is submitted for each major supplier of material and each manufacturer and supplier of equipment for manufacturers and suppliers of major items of material, equipment and systems to be used in the Work if the Bidder is awarded the contract.

Specification Section No.

Material or Equipment Description

Manufacturer and Supplier

The Surety who will be the surety on the Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond will be ___________________________________________________________________________.

Signature

7

SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING

The following information is submitted for each subcontractor that will be used in the Work if the Bidder is awarded the Agreement. Additional numbered pages shall be attached to this page as required. Each page shall be headed “SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING” and signed. All Work to be subcontracted over $________________ shall be listed.

Amount of Subcontract

Name and Address of Subcontractor

Portion of Work

Signature

{00313057.DOCX / 2}

BID BOND

STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF __________)

That we, __________________________ of the City of __________, County of ________________ and State of _______________________ (hereinafter called “Principal”), as Principal, and _________________________ (hereinafter called “Surety”), as Surety, authorized under the laws of the State of Colorado to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto ________________________ (hereinafter called “Owner”), as Obligee, in the sum of _______________________ Dollars ($__________) in lawful money of the United States for payment of which sum the Principal and Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally and firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, Principal has submitted a Bid Form (Proposal) to enter into a certain written agreement with Owner for Construction of __________________________, hereinafter referred to as “Agreement.”

WHEREAS, the Instructions to Bidders has required as a condition of receiving the Bid Form that the Principal submit Bid security in an amount not less than five per cent (5%) of the Bidder’s maximum Bid Price, including any and all alternates, which sum it is specifically agreed to be forfeited as liquidated damages in the event that the Principal defaults in its obligation as hereinafter specified, and, in pursuance of which requirement, this Bid Bond is made, executed and delivered.

NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if Owner shall accept the Bid Form (Proposal) of the Principal, and Principal shall faithfully enter into Agreement with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such Bid and give such Bonds as are specified in the Contract Documents, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

The sum of this Bid Bond shall be forfeited to Owner in its entirety as liquidated damages and not as a penalty upon Principal’s default.

The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligation of said Surety and its Bond in no way shall be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid Form (Proposal); and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.

{00313057.DOCX / 2} 2

Signed and sealed this _____ day of ______________, 20__.

PRINCIPAL:

By: (Address)

Attest: Secretary SIGNATURES If the Principal is doing business as a Corporation, the Bid Bond shall

be signed by an officer, i.e., President or Vice President. The signature of the officer shall be attested to by the Secretary and properly sealed. If the “Principal” is an individual or a partnership, the Bid Bond shall so indicate and be properly signed.

SURETY:

By: Attorney in Fact (Address) Surety’s Telephone No.:

Attest: Secretary THIS BOND MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY POWER OF ATTORNEY, EFFECTIVELY DATED. FAILURE TO PROVIDE A PROPERLY EXECUTED BID BOND WITH A PROPERLY EXECUTED POWER OF ATTORNEY MAY RESULT IN THE BIDDER’S PROPOSAL BEING DEEMED NON-RESPONSIVE.

{00575430.DOCX / }

AGREEMENT

This Agreement is made as of this ____ day of __________, 20___, between the Town of Gypsum, Colorado (“Gypsum”), a home rule municipal corporation organized pursuant to Article XX of the Colorado Constitution and Gypsum’s Home Rule Charter effective October 21, 1982, with a mailing address of PO Box 130, Gypsum, Colorado 81637-0130, and ______________, a Colorado ________________, with a mailing address of ________________, _____________ (“Contractor” and together with Gypsum, the “Parties” or either of the Parties, a “Party”).

In consideration of the mutual covenants, agreements, conditions and undertakings hereinafter set forth, Gypsum and Contractor agree as follows:

Section 1. Scope of Work. Contractor shall perform all work in accordance with the Contract Documents as identified in Section 18 for the Wastewater Treatment Plant, Lift Station Upgrade, including furnishing all construction plans and methods, construction management, labor, equipment and materials (generally referred to as the “Project”), and shall complete the Project, including any additional work authorized pursuant to Section 17, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and the Contract Documents.

Section 2. Contract Price. Gypsum shall pay Contractor for the performance of work and completion of the Project the total price of __________________ Dollars ($__________) (the “Contract Price”), subject to certain adjustments as herein provided, in accordance with the bid proposal submitted by Contractor. The Contract Price may be adjusted (i) for changes in the Contract Documents or for extensions of time to complete performance, if approved by Gypsum and Contractor as specified in Section 17; (ii) for any additional work authorized pursuant to Section 17; and (iii) for certain changes in quantities, if bid on a unit-price basis in the bid proposal. All unit quantities requiring an adjustment of the Contract Price shall be verified by Project Manager (as defined in Section 16).

Section 3. Progress Payments. Gypsum will make progress payments monthly on account of the Contract Price in accordance with partial payment applications prepared by Contractor for work performed during the last monthly period and approved by the Owner. Contractor shall submit partial payment applications for the last completed work period to Town of Gypsum by the Thursday before the second Tuesday of each month. Gypsum shall authorize progress payments for the amount approved by Project Manager and Gypsum under such partial payment applications on or the Wednesday following the second Tuesday day of each month. Progress payments shall not constitute final acceptance of the work. Gypsum may withhold progress payments if: (i) Contractor’s performance is inadequate or defective and not remedied in accordance with Project Manager’s directions; (ii) Contractor does not make prompt and proper disbursements to subcontractors on receipt of progress payments from Gypsum; (iii) Contractor does not promptly pay for materials, labor or equipment furnished on the Project; (iv) claims or liens are filed on the Project; or (v) in Project Manager’s opinion, Contractor’s performance is not progressing satisfactorily or completion of the Project is jeopardized or delayed.

{00575430.DOCX / } 2

Section 4. Retainage. An amount equal to five percent (5%) of each progress payment made on the Contract Price shall be retained by Gypsum. Gypsum shall pay the remaining amount of each progress payment to Contractor without retaining additional funds if, in the opinion of Project Manager and Gypsum, satisfactory progress is being made on the Project. Such retainage of the Contract Price shall be held by Gypsum until the Project is completed and finally accepted by Gypsum in accordance with the provisions hereof. Gypsum shall pay the full amount of such retainage to Contractor within sixty (60) days of final completion and acceptance, except to the extent of any claims filed pursuant to Section 38-26-107, C.R.S. Any release of retainage to Contractor or a subcontractor prior to final payment shall, in addition to any other requirements of the Contract Documents, require written approval from the surety furnishing bonds pursuant to Section 13.

Section 5. Final Payment.

a. Upon completion of the Project and Contractor’s submittal of notice thereof to Project Manager and Gypsum, Project Manager shall inspect the Project and reject any portion of performance not in conformity with the Contract Documents. Defective materials, equipment or work shall be remedied immediately by Contractor before final payment. Gypsum shall make final payment to Contractor within thirty (30) days after (i) final acceptance of performance by Gypsum as specified in Section 6 and (ii) receipt of Project Manager’s confirmation to Gypsum that the Project has been completed satisfactorily. Final payment shall not, however, be due until Contractor has delivered to Gypsum a complete release of all claims or liens against the Project and has produced satisfactory receipts, waivers or lien releases indicating final and total payment to all subcontractors and persons who have furnished materials, labor and equipment on which a lien or claim might potentially be filed in form acceptable to Gypsum. Gypsum shall, no later than ten (10) days before final payment is made, publish a notice of final payment at least twice in a legal newspaper of general circulation in any county where the work was contracted for or performed pursuant to Section 38-26-107, C.R.S.

b. By making final payment, Gypsum waives all claims against Contractor, except those expressly declared to Contractor in writing or those arising out of: (i) defective performance appearing after final acceptance; (ii) performance in patent noncompliance with Contract Documents, unless expressly waived by Gypsum; (iii) outstanding claims of any nature, including but not limited to claims for property damage or personal injury arising during the construction period or liens or claims against the Project; or (iv) Contractor’s failure to execute any warranty, guarantee or bond or to provide insurance or other indemnification required by the Contract Documents. By accepting final payment, Contractor waives all claims against Gypsum, except those expressly declared to Gypsum in writing received by Gypsum prior to final payment.

Section 6. Final Acceptance.

a. Final acceptance of the Project shall follow inspection and approval of Contractor’s performance by Project Manager, along with inspection by appropriate manufacturers’ representatives and governmental officials pursuant to local, State and federal requirements as necessary. Gypsum shall have the right to determine the acceptability of Contractor’s performance and conformance with the Contract Documents, which determination

{00575430.DOCX / } 3

shall be conclusive and binding upon Contractor. Final acceptance by Gypsum is subject to the provisions of Section 5 and in no manner affects or releases any warranty or guarantee with Contractor or manufacturers or suppliers of Project equipment or materials.

b. When presented for final acceptance, the Project shall be delivered to Gypsum in complete compliance with the Contract Documents free from any lien, claim or encumbrance, whether in existence or subsequently established by law, statute, ordinance or otherwise. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in the Contract Documents shall give Contractor or any subcontractor, laborer, supplier, manufacturer or other person or entity, either expressly or by implication, any right to assert a lien, claim or encumbrance against the Project.

Section 7. Commencement and Completion of Performance; Liquidated Damages.

a. Contractor shall commence performance within seven (7) days after receipt of written notice to proceed, which is expected to be given on or before June 13, 2018, and shall diligently prosecute all work through completion. Unless an extension of time is granted by Gypsum as hereinafter set forth, Contractor shall substantially complete the Project within a maximum period of 90 days after the date of written notice to proceed and shall finally complete the Project within a maximum period of 120 days after the date of Substantial Completion. For purposes of this Agreement, (i) “Substantial Completion” shall be the time at which the Project (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Project Manager, the Project (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Project (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized by Gypsum for the purposes for which it is intended; and (ii) “Final Completion” shall be the time at which Gypsum accepts the Project upon confirmation from Project Manager and Contractor that the Project is totally complete in accordance with Contract Documents.

b. If Contractor fails to perform the Project within the above-referenced performance deadlines or any extension thereof (the “Performance Deadlines”), Contractor shall pay to Gypsum as liquidated damages (and not as a penalty) for ordinary and general damages and inconvenience (exclusive of any special damages such as, by way of example and not limitation, any liabilities to third parties) the sum of:

1. Late startup of all major equipment: $100 per day

2. Late Substantial Completion: $100 per day

3. Late Final Completion: $100 per day.

These liquidated damages are based upon Gypsum’s evaluation of its likely losses in the

event the Performance Deadlines are not met. The liquidated damages herein established are agreed to by Contractor after full discussion of the implication of this Section. The failure to perform the work and complete the Project by the Performance Deadlines will cause significant damage to Gypsum. Gypsum and Contractor agree that such actual damages caused by Contractor’s failure to meet the Performance Deadlines would reasonably likely include, without limitation, the costs for additional construction management and other Gypsum

{00575430.DOCX / } 4

representative/employee time; the costs for third-party consultants’ time; inefficiency and inconvenience damages to Gypsum’s business operations; damages to Gypsum’s reputation with third-parties (including governmental entities with regulatory jurisdiction over Gypsum), as well as other potential actual damages to Gypsum reasonably associated with the subject matter of this Agreement. Contractor acknowledges that the liquidated damages established herein are a reasonable pre-estimate of the detriment Gypsum will suffer in the event Contractor fails to perform the work and complete the Project by the Performance Deadlines and, after a full discussion of the implications of this section, further acknowledges that it would be impractical and extremely difficult to estimate precisely the damages that Gypsum might suffer by reason of Contractor’s failure to perform the work and complete the Project by the Performance Deadlines. The liquidated damages established herein are intended to be and are cumulative and shall be in addition to any other remedy enforceable at law under this Agreement. Liquidated damages do not include any sums of money to reimburse Gypsum for extra costs which Gypsum may become obligated to pay on other contracts, which are delayed or extended because of Contractor’s failure to perform the work and complete the Project by the Performance Deadlines. Should Gypsum incur such other additional costs because of delays or extensions to other contracts resulting from Contractor’s unexcused failure or delay in performance, Gypsum will assess any such extra costs against Contractor in addition to the liquidated damages provided for herein.

c. No extension of time to complete performance shall be granted under normal circumstances. Extensions of time to complete performance may be authorized by Gypsum in its sole discretion for any actual period of delay on an occurrence basis for: (i) adverse weather or climatic conditions not reasonably anticipated; (ii) major labor disputes; (iii) acts of God; (iv) detrimental acts of Gypsum; (v) acts of another contractor in the performance of related work under a separate contract with Gypsum; (vi) delays resulting from the intervention of governmental agencies in the performance of work on the Project, if not caused by Contractor or its subcontractors; or (vii) other extraordinary circumstances beyond Contractor’s reasonable control. Foreseeable weather delays and delays or failures in delivery of equipment or materials shall not constitute cause for an extension of time to complete performance or for an adjustment to the Contract Price. Any request for an extension of time to complete performance shall be submitted in writing to Project Manager for Gypsum’s approval within ten (10) days after such occurrence and shall be accompanied and supported by a schedule analysis based on the critical path method, which shows how and where the delay occurred on the then-critical path and its effect on any milestone date or the date of Substantial Completion. The decision of Gypsum shall be conclusive and binding upon Contractor.

Section 8. Default. Gypsum may give written notice of grounds for default to Contractor at any time if: (i) Contractor fails to perform in an adequate or specified manner or proceeds in willful violation of the Contract Documents or terms of this Agreement, as determined by Project Manager or Gypsum; (ii) Project Manager advises Gypsum that performance of work on the Project is being delayed unnecessarily or that Contractor is executing its responsibilities in bad faith or contrary to the intent of this Agreement; (iii) performance is not fully completed within the period of time specified for completion under Section 7; (iv) work to be performed by Contractor is assigned without Gypsum’s consent; (v) Contractor is insolvent or files for bankruptcy; (vi) Contractor makes a general assignment of assets for the benefit of creditors; (vii) a receiver is appointed for Contractor; or (viii) other

{00575430.DOCX / } 5

serious and reasonable cause exists which jeopardizes completion of the Project. If Contractor does not remedy or otherwise correct the grounds for default within such period of time as specified by Gypsum, Gypsum may terminate this Agreement and direct Contractor to discontinue any further work on the Project, and Contractor shall immediately stop all work on the Project and forfeit all rights under this Agreement. Gypsum, in its discretion, may complete the Project, or may request the surety of Contractor to complete the Project, or may contract with others to complete the Project at the expense of Contractor and its surety. Any increase in costs over the Contract Price and any special damages incurred by Gypsum as a consequence of such default, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, shall be paid and satisfied in full by Contractor and its surety.

Section 9. Termination. At any time Gypsum may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy hereunder, elect to terminate this Agreement. In such event, Gypsum shall give written notice of Project termination to Contractor at least five (5) days in advance of the Project termination date. Such notice may include specific instructions as to work to be completed and other winding-up matters. In the absence of any contrary instructions, Contractor shall place no further orders or subcontracts, shall terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent they relate to terminated work, and shall stop work on the date and in accordance with directions specified in the notice. Contractor shall cooperate with Gypsum to transfer all of Contractor’s rights and interests in any orders, subcontracts or work as directed by Gypsum. Gypsum shall pay Contractor for the performance of all work through the Project termination date and for such additional amounts as, in the opinion of Project Manager, are reasonable to compensate Contractor for the termination of this Agreement. Final payment to Contractor shall be made in accordance with Section 5.

Section 10. Taxes, Licenses, Permits, Regulations and Illegal Aliens.

a. In all operations connected with the Project, Contractor shall pay all fees, charges and taxes imposed by law, except for sales and use taxes from which Gypsum or the Project are exempt, and shall obtain all licenses and permits necessary for completion of the Project, including payment of all fees, unless otherwise specified by the Contract Documents or Project Manager. Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations of all governmental authorities, whether local, State or federal, relating to the performance of work on the Project and particularly for compliance with those laws concerning the environment, stormwater management permits, workmen’s compensation, safety and health, labor, immigration and equal employment opportunity. Gypsum shall, upon request, furnish Contractor with a copy of its certificate of sales and use tax exemption. Gypsum shall not reimburse Contractor for any sales or use taxes paid to the State or any county or municipality from which Gypsum or the Project are exempt.

b. Contractor certifies that Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 8-17.5-101 et seq., C.R.S. Contractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this Agreement or enter into an agreement with a subcontractor that knowingly employs or contracts with an illegal alien. Contractor represents, warrants and agrees that it (i) has confirmed the employment eligibility of all employees who are newly hired for employment to perform work under this Agreement through participation in either the E-Verify Program or the Department Program described in Section 8-17.5-101, C.R.S.

{00575430.DOCX / } 6

Contractor shall not use either the E-Verify Program or the Department Program procedures to undertake pre-employment screening of job applicants while the public contract for services is being performed. If Contractor obtains actual knowledge that a subcontractor performing work under this Contract knowingly employs or contracts with an illegal alien, Contractor shall: (i) notify the subcontractor and Gypsum within three (3) days that Contractor has actual knowledge that the subcontractor is employing or contracting with an illegal alien; and (ii) terminate the subcontract with the subcontractor if within three (3) days of receiving such notice, the subcontractor does not stop employing or contracting with the illegal alien, unless the subcontractor provides information to establish that the subcontractor has not knowingly employed or contracted with an illegal alien. Contractor shall comply with all reasonable requests made in the course of an investigation by the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment. If Contractor fails to comply with any requirement of Section 8-17.5-102(2), C.R.S., Gypsum may terminate this Agreement for breach, and Contractor shall be liable for actual and consequential damages to Gypsum. If Contractor participates in the Department Program, Contractor shall provide the affirmation required under Section 8-17.5-102(5)(c)(II), C.R.S., to Gypsum.

c. Contractor, if operating as a sole proprietor, hereby swears or affirms under penalty of perjury that Contractor (i) is a citizen of the United States or legal permanent resident or otherwise lawfully present in the United States pursuant to federal law, (ii) shall comply with the provisions of Section 24-76.5-101 et seq., C.R.S., and (iii) shall produce one of the forms of identification required by Section 24-76.5-103, C.R.S., prior to the performance of any of its other obligations hereunder.

Section 11. Indemnification. Subject to Section 13-21-111.5(6), C.R.S., Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold Gypsum, and its officers, directors, employees, agents, engineers and attorneys, harmless from and against all costs, claims, damages, judgments, losses and expenses of every nature, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising at any time from any act or omission of Contractor, its employees, subcontractors and their employees, and all other persons directly or indirectly involved in or performing work for Contractor on the Project (other than Gypsum and any other third party while under the control or supervision of Gypsum).

Section 12. Insurance. During the term of this Agreement, Contractor shall: (i) maintain all insurance required by the State Workmen’s Compensation Act or any other employee benefit law; (ii) provide broad form general liability and property damage insurance in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 for bodily injury, death or damage to property of any person, and $2,000,000 for bodily injury, death or damage to property of more than one person, or such other greater amounts as may be specified in the Contract Documents for injuries, death or damages which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s acts or omissions in performing the Project work, designating Gypsum and Project Manager as “additional insureds” thereunder; and (iii) unless otherwise waived by Gypsum in writing, furnish builders risk insurance for protection against damage, explosion, fire, vandalism, theft and other dangers ordinarily included under such coverage, including loss of use resulting therefrom, to the full insurable value of all property, structures, equipment and material of Gypsum within Contractor’s control, designating Gypsum as “loss payee” thereunder. Contractor shall file certificates of insurance coverage satisfactory to Gypsum prior to commencement of performance. Such certificates shall provide

{00575430.DOCX / } 7

that coverages afforded thereunder shall not be cancelled until at least thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to Gypsum.

Section 13. Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond. Prior to commencement of performance, Contractor shall provide to Gypsum a general performance, payment and warranty bond executed by Contractor and an acceptable corporate surety, or collateral approved by Gypsum, in the full amount of the Contract Price, including provisions for any adjustment of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. Such bond shall expressly guarantee: (i) faithful performance of this Agreement and completion of the Project in complete compliance with the Contract Documents; (ii) repair and replacement, if required, or payment of the costs of all defective equipment, materials and work performed on the Project or as provided under any warranty, guarantee or other Contract Document for the full warranty and guarantee period; and (iii) payment to all persons performing labor and furnishing materials, supplies, tools and equipment in connection with the Project. Contractor shall obtain such bond on Gypsum’s behalf separate and apart from any similar bond or surety or warranty agreement entered into independently between Gypsum and any manufacturer or supplier. Gypsum may, in its discretion, require that the bond guaranteeing payment to all persons performing labor and furnishing materials, supplies, tools and equipment in connection with the Project be separate from the bond guaranteeing performance and warranting the work. Notwithstanding anything contained within the bonds to the contrary, such bonds are required, in part, by and shall comply with the minimum requirements of Section 38-26-106, C.R.S.

Section 14. Warranties and Guarantees. Contractor hereby represents, warrants and guarantees to Gypsum all workmanship, equipment and materials on or made a part of the Project and its structures for a period of two (2) years following Final Completion of the Project. Such warranty and guarantee shall be construed to include, but is not limited to, representations that all workmanship, equipment and materials are of good quality, free from any defects or irregularities, and in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. If any defect in workmanship, equipment or materials arises, Contractor shall remedy or otherwise correct such defect without cost to Gypsum within such reasonable period of time as specified by Gypsum in writing. If Contractor fails to repair such defect within such period of time as is specified by Gypsum, Gypsum may repair such defect or contract for such repairs at the expense of Contractor and its surety. The performance bond specified in Section 13 shall remain in full force and effect during the period of this warranty and guarantee, including any period necessary to remedy or otherwise correct any defects. Contractor shall provide such warranty and guarantee on Gypsum’s behalf separate and apart from other warranties, guarantees and surety agreements entered into independently between Gypsum and any manufacturer or supplier.

Section 15. Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others. Contractor shall, prior to commencement of performance, submit a list of all major subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities to be engaged to work on the Project for Gypsum’s reasonable acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto within ten (10) days after such submission). Contractor shall not substitute any subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity previously accepted by Gypsum without Gypsum’s prior written consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Gypsum’s acceptance of any such subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be withheld or revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. In such event, Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the

{00575430.DOCX / } 8

rejected subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price may be adjusted by any reasonable difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Gypsum of any such subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Gypsum or Project Manager to reject defective work. All contracts between Contractor and subcontractors shall conform explicitly to all applicable provisions of this Agreement and the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible and held liable for any bonding, insurance, warranties, indemnities, progress payments and completion of performance of or to such subcontractors, suppliers, or other individuals or entities. Upon receipt of progress and final payments from Gypsum, Contractor shall disburse the same immediately to subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals and entities without any requirement of Gypsum to supervise the same. No contractual relationship shall exist between Gypsum and any subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity because of the subcontracting of any part of the Project work.

Section 16. Project Manager. Official authority for the administration of all performance under this Agreement is hereby delegated to Gypsum’s engineer or project manager, who is Jim Hancock and is referred to herein as the “Project Manager,” unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. Throughout the construction period, Project Manager, or such other duly authorized representative of Gypsum, may inspect the Project and shall consult with Contractor in regard to any inquiries, directions or interpretations of the Contract Documents.

Section 17. Appropriations; Change Orders. This Agreement is subject to Section 24-91-103.6, C.R.S., and in accordance therewith:

a. Gypsum represents that it has appropriated money equal to or in excess of the Contract Price for the work.

b. Gypsum shall not issue any Change Order or other directive (other than a clarification) requiring additional compensable work to be performed that will cause the aggregate amount payable under this Agreement to exceed the amount appropriated for the original Contract Price and any subsequent appropriations, unless:

1. Contractor is given written assurance by Gypsum that lawful appropriations to cover the costs of the additional work have been made and are available prior to performance of the additional work; or

2. Such additional work is covered by the following remedy-granting provision: Contractor may request, in writing, a letter from Gypsum explaining the expected sources of funding for the additional work. In the event Gypsum does not provide such written assurance reasonably satisfactory to Contractor within five (5) days of Contractor’s request, Contractor may stop work until such time as Gypsum provides satisfactory assurances. Contractor’s acceptance of a Change Order in accordance with any assurances provided under this paragraph shall not limit or restrict Contractor from making a claim under the Contract Documents for an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Performance Deadlines or otherwise

{00575430.DOCX / } 9

for expenses or damages directly attributable to Contractor’s stoppage of the work as permitted hereunder.

c. For any Change Order or other directive (other than a clarification) that requires additional compensable work to be performed, Gypsum shall reimburse Contractor for Contractor’s costs on the periodic basis set forth in the Contract Documents for all additional directed work performed until the Change Order is finalized. In no instance shall the periodic reimbursement be required before Contractor has submitted an estimate of cost to Gypsum for the additional compensable work to be performed.

Section 18. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement and contract between Gypsum and Contractor and consist of (i) this Agreement and any exhibit or addendum hereto; (ii) any documents furnished to Contractor by or at the request of Gypsum in connection with the Project, including but not limited to notice to bidders, instructions to bidders, bid bond form, bid proposal, performance, payment and maintenance bonds, notice of award, [EJCDC Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, Form C-700, 2013 Edition, notice to proceed, specifications, plans, drawings and special conditions, and any addendum to such documents; and (iii) any modifications, change orders or other such revisions approved by the Parties in writing or duly authorized after the execution of this Agreement.

Section 19. Report of Differing Conditions. If Contractor believes that any technical data on which Contractor is entitled to rely is inaccurate, or any physical condition differs materially from that indicated, reflected or referred to in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall promptly, after becoming aware of such condition and before performing any further work in connection with the Project, notify Project Manager and Gypsum in writing about such inadequacy or difference.

Section 20. Amendment. This Agreement may be amended, from time to time, by agreement between the Parties. No amendment, modification or alteration of this Agreement shall be binding upon the Parties unless the same is in writing and approved by the duly authorized representatives of each Party. No document executed subsequent to this Agreement shall be interpreted to amend, modify or alter the terms of this Agreement, unless express reference to amending the terms of this Agreement is made in such document.

Section 21. Colorado Labor. If the Project is financed in whole or in part by funds of the State or any county, school Gypsum or municipality of the State, Colorado labor shall be employed to perform at least eighty percent (80%) of the work, unless such requirement is waived by the Gypsum in accordance with Section 8-17-101(1), C.R.S. “Colorado labor” means any person who is a resident of the State at the time of the Project. A “resident of the State” is a person who can provide a valid Colorado driver’s license, a valid State-issued photo identification, or documentation that he or she has resided in Colorado for the last thirty (30) days.

Section 22. Severability. If any term, section or other provision of this Agreement shall, for any reason, be held to be invalid or unenforceable, the invalidity or unenforceability of

{00575430.DOCX / } 10

such term, section or other provision shall not affect any of the remaining provisions of this Agreement.

Section 23. Waiver. No waiver by either Party of any right, term or condition of this Agreement shall be deemed or construed as a waiver of any other right, term or condition, nor shall a waiver of any breach hereof be deemed to constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach, whether of the same or of a different provision of this Agreement.

Section 24. Remedies. None of the remedies provided to either Party under this Agreement shall be required to be exhausted or exercised as a prerequisite to resort to any further relief to which such Party may then be entitled. Every obligation assumed by, or imposed upon, either Party shall be enforceable by any appropriate action, petition or proceeding at law or in equity, including specific performance. This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Colorado and particularly those relating to governmental contracts.

Section 25. Counterparts; Electronic Signatures; Electronic Records. This Agreement may be executed in multiple counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original, but all of which shall constitute one and the same document. The Parties consent to the use of electronic signatures and agree that the transaction may be conducted electronically pursuant to the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act, § 24-71.3-101 et seq., C.R.S. This Agreement and any other documents requiring a signature may be signed electronically by either Party. The Parties agree not to deny the legal effect or enforceability of this Agreement, solely because it is in electronic form or because an electronic record was used in its formation. The Parties agree not to object to the admissibility of this Agreement in the form of an electronic record, a paper copy of an electronic document, or a paper copy of a document bearing an electronic signature on the grounds that it is an electronic record or an electronic signature or that it is not in its original form or is not an original.

Section 26. Entirety. This Agreement and all other Contract Documents constitute the entire agreement between the Parties concerning the subject matter herein, and all prior negotiations, representations, contracts, understandings or agreements pertaining to such matters are merged into and superseded by this Agreement and the other Contract Documents.

Section 27. Conflicting Provisions; Grant Requirements Control; Interpretation. In the event any provision of this Agreement conflicts with any provision of any other Contract Document, then the provisions of this Agreement shall govern and control such conflicting provisions. If the Project is financed in whole or in part by a federal or State grant, any provision of the Contract Documents that is in conflict with the terms of such grant shall be inapplicable. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section, to the extent the Parties need guidance on a matter that is not addressed by the Contract Documents, such matter shall be governed by the pertinent provisions, if any, contained in the General Conditions.

Section 28. Assignment. Contractor shall not, at any time, assign any interest in this Agreement to any person or entity without the prior written consent of Gypsum. The terms of this Agreement shall inure to and be binding upon any successors and assigns of the Parties.

{00575430.DOCX / } 11

Section 29. Time. Unless otherwise expressly provided, any reference herein to days shall mean calendar days. All times stated in this Agreement are of the essence.

Section 30. Notice. Any notice required hereunder shall be in writing delivered to the applicable Party at the address set forth at the beginning of this Agreement or as changed pursuant to the provisions of this Section.

Section 31. Section Headings. The section headings in this Agreement and any other Contract Documents are inserted for convenience and are not intended to indicate completely or accurately the contents of the sections which they introduce, and shall have no bearing on the construction of the sections which they introduce.

Section 32. No Third Party Beneficiaries. The Parties to this Agreement do not intend to extend any benefits to any person not a Party to this Agreement. No person or entity, other than the Parties to this Agreement, shall have any rights, legal or equitable, to enforce or rely on any provision of this Agreement.

Section 33. Duly Authorized Signatories. By execution of this Agreement, the undersigned each individually represent that he or she is duly authorized to execute and deliver this Agreement and that the subject Party shall be bound by the signatory’s execution of this Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have executed this Agreement on the day and year first above written.

TOWN OF GYPSUM

By: Steve Carver, Mayor

{00575430.DOCX / } 12

ATTEST: By: Danette Schlegel, Town Clerk

CONTRACTOR By: Name: Title:

STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ____________________ )

The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this _____ day of __________, 20_____.

Witness my hand and official seal.

My commission expires: Notary Public

Z:\93503\93503.56 Wastewater\Lift Sta at Headwks\bid docs for station upgrade\Final bid set\boilerplate\Lift Station PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND.docx

PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND

STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF EAGLE )

That we, _____________________________________________________, of the County

of _____________________, and State of __________________________ (hereinafter called

“Principal”), as Principal, and _______________________________________________

(hereinafter called “Surety”), as Surety, authorized under the laws of the State of Colorado to act

as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Gypsum (hereinafter

called “Owner”) as Obligee, in the penal sum of _____________________________ Dollars

($____________) in lawful money of the United States for payment by Principal and Surety, and

bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally

and firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, Principal has, on _______________________, 20___, entered into a written

Agreement with Owner for construction of the Project as defined in said Agreement, which

Agreement is by reference made a part hereof and is hereinafter referred to as the Agreement.

NOW, THEREFORE, the conditions of this obligation are that if the Principal shall:

(1) faithfully perform said Agreement on Principal’s part and satisfy all claims and demands

incurred for the same; (2) fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages

which said Owner may suffer by reason of Principal’s failure so to do; (3) fully reimburse and

repay said Owner all outlay and expenses which said Owner may incur in making good any default;

(4) pay all persons, firms and corporations all just claims due them for the payment of all laborers

and mechanics for labor performed, for all materials and equipment furnished, and for all materials

2

and equipment used or rented in the performance of Principal’s Agreement; and (5) keep the Work

constructed under this Agreement in good repair for a period of two years from date of final

acceptance by said Owner, then this obligation is null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full

force and effect.

To the extent permissible by law, the Principal shall protect, defend, indemnify and save

harmless the Owner, the Engineer, and their officers, agents, servants and employees, from and

against suits, actions, claims, losses, liability or damage of any character, and from and against

costs and expenses including, in part, attorney fees incidental to the defense of such suits, actions,

claims, losses, damages or liability on account of injury, disease, sickness, and death to any person

or damage to property, including in part the loss of use resulting therefrom, based upon or allegedly

based upon any act, omission or occurrence of the Principal, or his employees, servants, agents,

subcontractors or suppliers, or anyone else under the Principal’s direction and control, and arising

out of, occurring in connection with, resulting from, or caused by the performance or failure of

performance of any work or services called for by the Agreement, or from conditions created by

the performance or non-performance of said work or services.

This indemnity shall not extend to liability arising out of the preparation by the Engineer

of the design or specifications for the Owner or the giving of written directions or instruction by

the Engineer as may be required by the Contract Documents, provided the giving of such written

instructions or directions is the proximate cause of the injury or damage should it occur.

Whenever Principal shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the

Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner’s obligations thereunder, the Owner may avail

itself of the provisions of Section 15.02 B of the General Conditions which are incorporated by

3

reference in the Agreement and the Surety shall promptly pay the amounts, if any, due Owner by

Principal.

Any suit under this Bond must be instituted before the expiration of three years from the

date on which final payment under the Agreement falls due.

No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to or for the use of any person or corporation

other than the Owner named herein or the successors and assigns of Owner and to all persons,

firms and corporations for all just claims due them for the payment of all laborers and mechanics

for labor performed, for all materials and equipment furnished, and for all materials and equipment

used or rented in the performance of Principal’s Agreement.

The Surety hereby waives the right to special notification of any notification of or

alterations, omissions or reductions, extra or additional work, extensions of time, Change Orders,

Field Orders or any other act or acts of Owner or its authorized agents under the terms of the

Agreement; and failure to notify Surety of such shall in no way relieve Surety of its obligations.

4

Signed and sealed this ______ day of _____________________, 20___.

PRINCIPAL:

By:

Witness

(Address) SURETY:

By:

Witness

(Address)

Surety’s Telephone No.:

Z:\93503\93503.56 Wastewater\Lift Sta at Headwks\bid docs for station upgrade\Final bid set\boilerplate\Lift Station PAYMENT BOND.docx

PAYMENT BOND

STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF EAGLE )

That we, __________________________________________________________, of the

County of ______________________, and State of __________________________ (hereinafter

called “Principal”), as Principal, and ________________________________________________

(hereinafter called “Surety”), as Surety, authorized under the laws of the State of Colorado to act

as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto _________________________

(hereinafter called “Owner”), as Obligee, in the penal sum of _____________________ Dollars

($_____________) in lawful money of the United States for payment by Principal and Surety, and

bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally

and firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, Principal has, on _____________________, 20___, entered into a written

Agreement with Owner for construction of the Project as defined in said Agreement, which

Agreement is by reference made a part hereof and is hereinafter referred to as the Agreement.

NOW, THEREFORE, the conditions of this obligation are that if the Principal shall pay

all persons, firms and corporations all just claims due them for the payment of all laborers and

mechanics for labor performed, for all materials and equipment furnished, and for all materials

and equipment used or rented in the performance of Principal’s Agreement, then this obligation is

null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.

2

To the extent permissible by law, the Principal shall protect, defend, indemnify and save

harmless the Owner, the Engineer, and their officers, agents, servants and employees, from and

against suits, actions, claims, losses, liability or damage of any character, and from and against

costs and expenses including, in part, attorney fees incidental to the defense of such suits, actions,

claims, losses, damages or liability on account of injury, disease, sickness, and death to any person

or damage to property, including in part the loss of use resulting therefrom, based upon or allegedly

based upon any act, omission or occurrence of the Principal, or his employees, servants, agents,

subcontractors or suppliers, or anyone else under the Principal’s direction and control, and arising

out of, occurring in connection with, resulting from, or caused by the performance or failure of

performance of any work or services called for by the Agreement, or from conditions created by

the performance or non-performance of said work or services.

This indemnity shall not extend to liability arising out of the preparation by the Engineer

of the design or specifications for the Owner or the giving of written directions or instruction by

the Engineer as may be required by the Contract Documents, provided the giving of such written

instructions or directions is the proximate cause of the injury or damage should it occur.

Whenever Principal shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the

Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner’s obligations thereunder, the Owner may avail

itself of the provisions of Section 15.02 B of the General Conditions which are incorporated by

reference in the Agreement and the Surety shall promptly pay the amounts, if any, due Owner by

Principal.

Any suit under this Bond must be instituted before the expiration of three years from the

date on which final payment under the Agreement falls due.

3

No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to or for the use of any person or corporation

other than the Owner named herein or the successors and assigns of Owner and to all persons,

firms and corporations for all just claims due them for the payment of all laborers and mechanics

for labor performed, for all materials and equipment furnished, and for all materials and equipment

used or rented in the performance of Principal’s Agreement.

The Surety hereby waives the right to special notification of any notification of or

alterations, omissions or reductions, extra or additional work, extensions of time, Change Orders,

Field Orders or any other act or acts of Owner or its authorized agents under the terms of the

Agreement; and failure to notify Surety of such shall in no way relieve Surety of its obligations.

Signed and sealed this _______ day of ____________________, 20___.

PRINCIPAL:

By:

Witness

(Address) SURETY:

By:

Witness

(Address)

Surety’s Telephone No.:

{00313063.DOCX /}

NOTICE OF AWARD

Town of Gypsum, Colorado Date: ____________________ To:

The Owner, having duly considered the Bid Form submitted on ______________, 20__, for the Work covered by the Contract Documents (titled and numbered GYPSUM CREEK RAW WATERLINE REPLACEMENT, Specifications No. ___________________) in the amount of ___________________ Dollars ($___________), and it appearing that the Price and other information in your Bid Form is fair, equitable and to the best interest of the Owner, the offer in your Bid Form is hereby accepted.

In accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, you are required to execute the Agreement and Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond in six counterparts within ten (10) consecutive days from and including the date of this Notice of Award.

In addition, you are required to furnish at the said time a Certificate of Insurance and an Opinion of an insurance agent or counsel evidencing compliance with the requirements for insurance as stated in the Contract Documents.

The Bid security submitted with your Proposal will be returned upon execution of the Agreement and furnishing of the required Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond, and Certificates and Opinion of Insurance within the time limit specified. In the event that you should fail to execute the Agreement and furnish the Performance, Payment and Warranty Bond and Certificates and Opinion of Insurance within the time limit specified, said Bid security will be retained by the Owner as liquidated damages and not as a penalty for the delay and extra work caused thereby.

You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to Engineer.

By:

Title:

{00313063.DOCX /} 2

ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF NOTICE OF AWARD:

Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged this ___ day of ________________, 20__.

Contractor

By:

Title:

{00313066.DOCX /}

NOTICE TO PROCEED

Town of Gypsum, Colorado Date: _____________________ To:

You are hereby authorized to proceed as of the date of this Letter or within ten (10) consecutive calendar days hereafter with the Work covered by the Contract Documents titled and numbered GYPSUM CREEK RAW WATERLINE REPLACEMENT for the sum of __________________________ Dollars ($_______________). The Contract Time, as such term is defined in the General Conditions, shall commence to run on the date of this Letter.

You are to return promptly to Engineer an acknowledged copy of this Notice to Proceed and you are to notify the Engineer 48 hours before starting work.

[Name of Owner]

By:

Title:

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT OF NOTICE TO PROCEED:

Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this ____ day of __________, 20__.

CONTRACTOR

By:

Title:

{

NOTICE OF FINAL PAYMENT

NOTICE is hereby given that the ________________________________ (“Owner”) of ____________ County, Colorado, will make final payment at ______________________________________________, Colorado, on __________, 20__, at the hour of ______ __.m. to ___________________________, of _________________________, Colorado for all work done by said Contractor(s) in construction work performed within the Town.

Any person, co-partnership, association of persons, company or corporation that has furnished labor, materials, team hire, sustenance, provisions, provender, or other supplies used or consumed by such contractors or their subcontractors, in or about the performance of the work contracted to be done or that supplies rental machinery, tools, or equipment to the extent used in the prosecution of the work, and whose claim therefor has not been paid by the contractors or their subcontractors, at any time up to and including the time of final settlement for the work contracted to be done, is required to file a verified statement of the amount due and unpaid, and an account of such claim, to the District, whose address is _________________________________________, on or before the date and time hereinabove shown. Failure on the part of any claimant to file such verified statement of claim prior to such final settlement will release the Owner, officers, agents, and employees, of and from any and all liability for such claim.

All of the above is pursuant to § 38-26-107, C.R.S.

BY Town of Gypsum ________________________

By: Secretary

First Publication: _______________, 20__.

Last Publication: _____________, 20__.

Published in: ________________

{00438037.DOC /}

License Agreement Before you use this EJCDC document: 1. Read this License Agreement in its entirety. As

purchaser, you agree to comply with and are bound by the License Agreement’s terms, conditions, and instructions when you use the attached EJCDC document. Commencement of use of the attached document indicates your acceptance of these terms, conditions, and instructions. If you do not agree to them, you should promptly return the materials to the vendor.

2. This License Agreement applies to the attached document only. Other licensing terms and instructions may apply to other EJCDC documents.

3. The Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee ("EJCDC") provides EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents (including but not limited to the EJCDC document that is attached, and all other documents in the EJCDC Construction Series, Engineering Series, Design-Build Series, Remediation Series, Procurement Series, and Narrative Series) and licenses their use worldwide. You assume sole responsibility for the selection of specific documents or portions thereof to achieve your intended results, and for the installation, use, and results obtained from EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents.

4. You acknowledge that you understand that the text of the EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents has important legal consequences and that consultation with an attorney is recommended with respect to use or modification of the text. You further acknowledge that EJCDC documents are protected by the copyright laws of the United States.

5. Make sure that you have the correct word processing

software for the attached EJCDC document, which is distributed in Microsoft Word (.doc) format.

6. EJCDC allows the end user wide discretion in using and editing the attached document, subject to the provisions of the License Agreement. You are advised, however, that EJCDC documents contain numeric and other cross-references, and that changes to one part of the document may affect other parts. It is solely your responsibility to assure the adequacy and consistency of the final document for your purposes.

How to Use This Document:

1. Although EJCDC has made reasonable efforts to achieve uniformity of formatting, some document controls (e.g., bold, underline, font size, indentation, numbering, pagination, table of contents) may be affected by software versioning and translators, user settings, changes during editing, and other factors, and may require user intervention to restore intended format and appearance.

2. The term “Standard EJCDC Text” for the attached

document generally refers to all text prepared by EJCDC in the main body of the document, and does not include covers, logos, footers, instructions, license agreement, copyright notices, Notes to Users, or text options. The content of document exhibits (if any) is not Standard EJCDC Text for this purpose.

2. If you do not alter the Standard EJCDC Text of the attached document, you may use it as published, with all EJCDC logos, footers, and copyright notices retained.

3. If you modify the Standard EJCDC Text of the attached document, you must follow the following instructions that address if, when, and how to show the changes to other parties.

4. During the drafting or negotiating process for the document, it is important that the two contracting parties are both aware of any changes that have been made to the Standard EJCDC Text. Thus if a draft of the document purports to be or appears to be an EJCDC document, the user must plainly show all changes to the Standard EJCDC Text, using “Track Changes” (redline/strikeout), highlighting, or other means of clearly indicating additions and deletions.

5. As between contracting parties, once the document is ready to be finalized (and if applicable executed by the contracting parties), it is no longer necessary to continue to show changes to the Standard EJCDC Text. The parties may produce a final version of the document in a format in which all changes are accepted, and the document at that point does not need to include any “Track Changes,” redline/strikeout, highlighting, or other indication of additions and deletions to the Standard EJCDC Text.

6. If the attached document is revised or altered and then presented to others (such as potential bidders, grant agencies, lenders, or sureties) as an EJCDC document, then the changes to the Standard EJCDC Text must be shown, or the third parties must receive access to a

{00438037.DOC /}

version that shows the changes.

7. The attached EJCDC document may contain “Notes to User,” bracketed comments, or prompts that provide instructions for filling in project-specific information, selecting the appropriate clause from a list of options, or making additions or deletions, or that give background information regarding a particular provision. The user may (and in most cases should) delete these notes, comments, and prompts during the drafting process. Deletion of such notes, comments, and prompts is not subject to the License Agreement requirement that additions or deletions to Standard EJCDC Text be shown clearly, and therefore does not need to be shown with “Track Changes,” redline/strikeout, highlighting, or other means of indicating changes, at any point in the drafting process.

8. The attached EJCDC document may contain exhibits that are to be used to set out project-specific provisions, such as scope of services, compensation, and insurance requirements. These exhibits are meant to be revised, supplemented, and altered by the user, or discarded if not applicable to the specific project. The text of the various exhibits is not considered Standard EJCDC Text and is not subject to the License Agreement requirement that additions or deletions to the Standard EJCDC Text be shown clearly, and therefore does not need to be shown with “Track Changes,” redline/strikeout, highlighting, or other means of indicating changes, at any point in the drafting process.

9. In a few instances the EJCDC Notes to User will instruct the user of a document to choose one of two or more text options in the main body of the document. In such cases the options that are not selected should be discarded or deleted, and not included in the final version of the document. Such discarding or deletion of text options is not subject to the License Agreement requirement that additions or deletions to Standard EJCDC Text be shown clearly, and therefore does not need to be shown with highlighting, redline/strikeout, or other means of tracking changes, at any point in the drafting process. Note, however, that the text that is selected (which in this scenario is in the main body of the document and not in an exhibit) is Standard EJCDC Text, and any revision or alteration of the text that is selected is subject to the License Agreement requirement that additions or deletions to Standard EJCDC Text be shown clearly.

10. The License Agreement typically is removed when a document is being prepared for use on a specific project. Such removal is not subject to the License Agreement requirement that additions or deletions to Standard EJCDC Text be shown clearly, and therefore does not need to be shown with highlighting, redline/strikeout, or other means of tracking changes, at any point in the drafting process. The terms of the License Agreement remain in effect regardless of whether it has been removed or remains attached to the document.

11. When a document is being prepared for use on a specific project, some users remove the EJCDC front cover page, and the “inside front cover page” containing specific information regarding the EJCDC sponsoring organizations. Such removal is not subject to the License Agreement requirement that additions or deletions to Standard EJCDC Text be shown clearly, and therefore does not need to be shown with highlighting, redline/strikeout, or other means of tracking changes, at any point in the drafting process.

12. As purchaser of the attached document, you may choose to use it as the basis or platform for creating purchaser’s own custom version. In such case you must remove all EJCDC logos, footers, and other items that might create the false impression that the document remains an EJCDC standard document, and the requirements regarding the need to show additions and deletions to the Standard EJCDC Text no longer apply. Note, however, that the copyright requirements of the License Agreement continue to apply.

13. A purchaser may choose to select clauses or sections of the attached document for inclusion in other non-EJCDC documents. When this occurs, do not use any EJCDC logos, footers, or other items that would imply that the receiving document is an EJCDC document. Note, however, that the copyright requirements of the License Agreement continue to apply.

Limited License: As purchaser, you have a limited nonexclusive license to: 1. Use the attached EJCDC document on any number of

machines owned, leased, or rented by your company or organization.

2. Use the attached EJCDC document for bona fide

contractual and project purposes. Such purposes expressly include controlled distribution to bona fide bidders and proposers, either through direct transmittal in printed or electronic format or posting on a website or other electronic distribution point to which access is limited to bona fide bidders and proposers or others having direct interest in the contract or project.

3. Copy the attached EJCDC document into any machine-readable or printed form for backup or modification purposes in support of your use of the document.

You further agree: 1. To comply with all terms, conditions, and instructions in

this License Agreement.

2. That all proprietary and intellectual property rights in the attached EJCDC document and all other EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents are and shall remain the property of EJCDC and its sponsoring organizations.

{00438037.DOC /}

3. To include the appropriate EJCDC copyright notice (selected from the versions below) on any copy, modified or finalized version, or portion of the attached EJCDC document. For this document, at a minimum one of the following EJCDC copyright notices must appear in a prominent location:

If the standard EJCDC text is not altered, then use the copyright that is already stated in the published document:

Copyright © [EJCDC document date] National

Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

If the standard EJCDC text has been altered, or if only portions of the EJCDC document have been used, then use the following copyright notice:

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC

®

Z-xxx, Copyright © 20xx by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers, or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright.

4. To not use, copy, modify, or transfer the attached EJCDC

document or any other EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents, or any copy, modification or merged portion, in whole or in part, except as expressly provided for in this license. Reproduction of the attached EJCDC document, or any other EJCDC Design and Construction Related Document, in printed or machine-readable format for resale, and any resale of this document in any format, are expressly prohibited. Making the attached EJCDC document or any other EJCDC Design and Construction Related Document, in whole or in part, available or accessible on an uncontrolled, public-access website or other uncontrolled electronic distribution point—in any format whatever, whether with or without watermarks, as a Microsoft Word document or in portable document format (PDF)—is expressly prohibited.

5. As an EJCDC limited licensee you may seek advance

written permission from the EJCDC Copyright Administrator to use the attached EJCDC document for educational purposes, subject to terms and conditions to be established by the Copyright Administrator for the specific educational use.

Term: This license is effective for three years after date of purchase, or six years after the last day of the year of issuance for the attached document (shown in the copyright notice), whichever occurs later, and shall terminate at that time, unless earlier terminated as provided herein, or unless EJCDC

extends the term of this license to you, in writing, or publishes on the ejcdc.org website or the websites of the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers, an applicable extension of the term of license for a certain period of time for bona fide contractual and project or other authorized uses. You agree upon termination to destroy the attached EJCDC Design and Construction Related Document along with all copies, modifications and merged portions in any form (except those copies already in actual project or contract use, or maintained in files or records of completed projects). EJCDC reserves the right during the term of this agreement to provide access to the purchased document through alternative means, based on improvements or changes in technology, or to transition the document to secure document platforms or other formats, while maintaining user’s access privileges. EJCDC from time to time publishes new, updated editions of the EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents. EJCDC highly recommends the use of the most current editions of its documents. EJCDC may, at its sole discretion, withdraw from authorized use any document that has been subsequently updated and for which the license has expired. You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the attached EJCDC document together with all copies, modifications and merged portions in any form (except those copies already in actual project or contract use, or maintained in files or records of completed projects). It will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in this License Agreement or if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License Agreement. Limited Warranty: If EJCDC has distributed this document on a compact disc, then EJCDC warrants the CD on which this document is furnished to be free from physical defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you as evidenced by a copy of your receipt. There is no other warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Some states do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to you. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. EJCDC does not warrant that the functions contained in EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents will meet your requirements or that the operation of EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents will be uninterrupted or error free. Limitations of Remedies: EJCDC’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be: 1. the replacement of the CD (if any) distributed by EJCDC,

containing this document, provided such CD does not

{00438037.DOC /}

meet EJCDC's "Limited Warranty" and is returned to EJCDC’s selling agent with a copy of your receipt, or

2. if EJCDC’s selling agent is unable to deliver a replacement

CD which is free of defects in materials and workmanship, you may terminate this Agreement by returning EJCDC Document and your money will be refunded.

As purchaser, you assume full responsibility for determining the suitability of this document to your purposes, and for the application and use of this document for contract or project purposes. To the fullest extent permitted by law, in no event will EJCDC, its sponsoring organizations, its committee members, attorneys, consultants, authorized vendors, or advisors, or their respective staff members, employees, agents, or contractors, be liable to you or any other party for any damages, including any lost profits, lost savings, contractual liabilities, disappointed commercial expectations, economic loss, or other direct, incidental, or consequential damages arising out of the content, unenforceability, insufficiency, inadequacy, use or inability to use the attached EJCDC document or any other EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents, even if EJCDC has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by any other party. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so portions of the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. General: You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer this license except as expressly provided in this License Agreement. Any attempt otherwise to sublicense, assign, or transfer any of the rights, duties, or obligations hereunder is void. If you transfer or purport to transfer such rights, duties, or obligations to another party, your license is automatically terminated. This License Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Virginia. If you have any questions concerning this License Agreement, or any requests or inquiries regarding the EJCDC copyright, you may contact EJCDC by writing to: EJCDC Copyright Administrator

c/o National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street Alexandria, VA 22314 Phone: (703) 684-2845 Fax: (703) 836-4875 e-mail: [email protected] You acknowledge that you have read this License Agreement, understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. You further agree that it is the complete and exclusive statement of the License Agreement and supersedes any proposal or prior agreement, oral or written, and any other communications between us relating to the subject matter of this License Agreement.

Information regarding the content of the attached EJCDC document and other EJCDC Design and Construction Related Documents may be obtained at ejcdc.org or from the following EJCDC sponsoring organizations:

National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794

(703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005 (202) 347-7474 www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org


http://www.nspe.org/

http://www.acec.org/

http://www.asce.org/

{00438037.DOC /}EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (EJCDC® C-520, Stipulated Sum, or C-525, Cost-Plus, 2013 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other.

To prepare supplementary conditions that are coordinated with the General Conditions, use EJCDC’s Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC® C-800, 2013 Edition). The full EJCDC Construction series of documents is discussed in the Commentary on the 2013 EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC® C-001, 2013 Edition).

Copyright © 2013:

National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794

(703) 684-2882

www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005

(202) 347-7474

www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400

(800) 548-2723

www.asce.org

The copyright for this document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE.

NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.

http://www.nspe.org/

http://www.acec.org/

http://www.asce.org/

http://www.ejcdc.org/


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ......................................................................................... 1

1.01 Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.02 Terminology ........................................................................................................................... 5

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ....................................................................................................... 6

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ........................................................................ 6

2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................. 6

2.03 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................. 6

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 7

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................. 7

2.06 Electronic Transmittals ........................................................................................................... 7

Article 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 8

3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................... 8

3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................. 8

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................. 8

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ............................................................................ 9

3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................ 10

Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ................................................................ 10

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ...................................................... 10

4.02 Starting the Work ................................................................................................................. 10

4.03 Reference Points .................................................................................................................. 10

4.04 Progress Schedule ................................................................................................................ 10

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ........................................................................................... 11

Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 12

5.01 Availability of Lands ............................................................................................................. 12

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. 12

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ..................................................................................... 13

5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................ 14

5.05 Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 15


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii

5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ...................................................................... 17

Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................... 19

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................... 19

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................ 19

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ......................................................................................................... 20

6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................. 23

6.05 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... 23

6.06 Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... 25

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ................................................... 25

Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 26

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence ....................................................................................... 26

7.02 Labor; Working Hours .......................................................................................................... 26

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ..................................................................................... 26

7.04 “Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................... 27

7.05 Substitutes ........................................................................................................................... 28

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................. 29

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................................................................... 31

7.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................. 31

7.09 Taxes .................................................................................................................................... 32

7.10 Laws and Regulations ........................................................................................................... 32

7.11 Record Documents ............................................................................................................... 32

7.12 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... 32

7.13 Safety Representative .......................................................................................................... 33

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ....................................................................................... 33

7.15 Emergencies ......................................................................................................................... 34

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals .................................................................. 34

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee................................................................... 36

7.18 Indemnification .................................................................................................................... 37

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................... 37

Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................ 38

8.01 Other Work .......................................................................................................................... 38

8.02 Coordination ........................................................................................................................ 39

8.03 Legal Relationships ............................................................................................................... 39


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii

Article 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 40

9.01 Communications to Contractor ............................................................................................ 40

9.02 Replacement of Engineer ..................................................................................................... 40

9.03 Furnish Data ......................................................................................................................... 40

9.04 Pay When Due ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .......................................................... 40

9.06 Insurance .............................................................................................................................. 40

9.07 Change Orders ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 41

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................. 41

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ............................................................... 41

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .................................................................................... 41

9.12 Safety Programs ................................................................................................................... 41

Article 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ...................................................................... 41

10.01 Owner’s Representative ....................................................................................................... 41

10.02 Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... 41

10.03 Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 42

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 42

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .................................................................... 42

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work .................................................................................... 42

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 42

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities .................................................... 42

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program ......................................................................................... 43

Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ...................................... 43

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .......................................................... 43

11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................. 44

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ..................................................................................... 44

11.04 Change of Contract Price ..................................................................................................... 44

11.05 Change of Contract Times .................................................................................................... 45

11.06 Change Proposals ................................................................................................................. 45

11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................. 46

11.08 Notification to Surety ........................................................................................................... 47

Article 12 – Claims ......................................................................................................................... 47


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv

12.01 Claims ................................................................................................................................... 47

Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ........................................................ 48

13.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................. 48

13.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................... 50

13.03 Unit Price Work .................................................................................................................... 51

Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....... 52

14.01 Access to Work ..................................................................................................................... 52

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 52

14.03 Defective Work..................................................................................................................... 53

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................. 53

14.05 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................. 53

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work .................................................................................................. 54

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work .................................................................................... 54

Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period .......................... 55

15.01 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................... 55

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ............................................................................................. 58

15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................ 58

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ..................................................................................................... 59

15.05 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 59

15.06 Final Payment ....................................................................................................................... 59

15.07 Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................. 61

15.08 Correction Period ................................................................................................................. 61

Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ....................................................................... 62

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work .................................................................................................. 62

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ......................................................................................... 62

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................. 63

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................ 63

Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ...................................................................................... 64

17.01 Methods and Procedures ..................................................................................................... 64

Article 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................ 64

18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................ 64

18.02 Computation of Times .......................................................................................................... 64

18.03 Cumulative Remedies .......................................................................................................... 64


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page v

18.04 Limitation of Damages ......................................................................................................... 65

18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................ 65

18.06 Survival of Obligations ......................................................................................................... 65

18.07 Controlling Law .................................................................................................................... 65

18.08 Headings ............................................................................................................................... 65


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 65

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.

2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.

4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed.

5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.

6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda.

7. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.

8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract.

9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.

10. Claim—(a) A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract; or (b) a demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer



has declined to address. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.

11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5501 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute, law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material.

12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work.

13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract.

14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. .

15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work.

16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work.

17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.

18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.

19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective.

20. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.

21. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental Condition.

23. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.



24. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real property, or personal property.

25. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.

26. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid.

27. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work.

28. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract.

29. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.

30. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part.

31. Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for, procuring and constructing the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual may be bound in one or more volumes.

32. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative.

33. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged.

34. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals and the performance of related construction activities.

35. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

36. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.



37. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.

38. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work.

39. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.

40. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.

41. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions.

42. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions.

43. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.

44. Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site, or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06.

45. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

46. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.

47. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.



48. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents.

C. Day:

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.

D. Defective:

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or

b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04).

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.



3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. Bonds: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6.

C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the executed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.

B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer.

2.03 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review:

1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract;

2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and



3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records.

B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work.

2.06 Electronic Transmittals

A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may transmit, and shall accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals, in electronic media or digital format, either directly, or through access to a secure Project website.

B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for electronic or digital transmittals, then Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.

C. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or



computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or from those established in applicable transmittal protocols.

ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version shall govern.

D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral.

E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations

1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer.

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies:

1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict,



error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies:

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents

A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder.

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim.

C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.



3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or

2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.

ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier.

4.02 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date.

4.03 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times.



2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.

B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress

A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor.

C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following:

1. severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes;

2. abnormal weather conditions;

3. acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and

4. acts of war or terrorism.

D. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5.

E. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site.

F. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor.



G. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event.

ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

5.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.

2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part



by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.

D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them.

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site;

2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities); and

3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.



5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.

C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part.

D. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A;

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,



c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; or

b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question.

5.05 Underground Facilities

A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site;

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being at the Site;

c. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and

d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after



becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer.

C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.

D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part.

E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the Underground Facility in question;

b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;

c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times; and

d. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question.



5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and

2. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern.

E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs.



F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.

G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off.

H. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8.

I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.H shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.



ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the Supplementary Conditions, or other specific provisions of the Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond.

C. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required amounts.

D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the Project is located, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the bond and surety requirements above.

E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

F. Upon request, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work.

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions

A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions.

B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better.

C. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, in the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is



maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.

D. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.

E. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, shall not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.

F. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage.

G. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site, impose an appropriate set-off against payment, and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

H. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.

I. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests.

J. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract.

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance

A. Workers’ Compensation: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts.

2. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable).

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees (by stop-gap endorsement in monopolist worker’s compensation states).



4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable).

B. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against:

1. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees.

2. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage.

3. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom.

C. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy shall be written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements:

1. Products and completed operations coverage:

a. Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment.

b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.

2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, to the extent permitted by law, including but not limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18.

3. Broad form property damage coverage.

4. Severability of interest.

5. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.

6. Personal injury coverage.

7. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together); or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together); or their equivalent.

8. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04, “Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent.

D. Automobile liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis.

E. Umbrella or excess liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Subject to industry-standard exclusions, the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every one of the underlying policies.

F. Contractor’s pollution liability insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy covering third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs, as a result



of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion.

G. Additional insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, umbrella or excess, and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions; include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations) on a non-contributory basis. Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements.

H. Contractor’s professional liability insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance shall provide protection against claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services, and caused by a negligent error, omission, or act for which the insured party is legally liable. It shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after Substantial Completion. If such professional design services are performed by a Subcontractor, and not by Contractor itself, then the requirements of this paragraph may be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such Subcontractor.

I. General provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall:

1. include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article.

2. be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions, or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater.

3. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner, Engineer, and each other insured under the policy.

4. remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this Article) and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

5. be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies, and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies.



6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents.

B. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.

6.05 Property Insurance

A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds, and all Subcontractors, and any individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under such builder’s risk policy, as insureds or named insureds. For purposes of the remainder of this Paragraph 6.05, Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07, and any corresponding Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured shall collectively be referred to as “insureds.”

2. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor.

3. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures.

4. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects).



5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier).

6. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit.

7. allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner, such that those portions of the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.

8. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth below.

9. provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered.

10. not include a co-insurance clause.

11. include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions.

12. include performance/hot testing and start-up.

13. be maintained in effect, subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner, until the Work is complete.

B. Notice of Cancellation or Change: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured.

C. Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk or property insurance shall pay for costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible.

D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer. The builder’s risk insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy; rather, those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may come off the builder’s risk policy, while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.

E. Additional Insurance: If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.05, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.

F. Insurance of Other Property: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property owned by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or an employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it, and if so in what amount.



6.06 Waiver of Rights

A. All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05, expressly including the builder’s risk policy, shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all Subcontractors, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for:

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 6.06.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the



policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim.

B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the money so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by Change Order, if needed.

ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances.

7.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld.

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents.

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and



guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.

7.04 “Or Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described below.

1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer shall deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics;

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole;

3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and

4) it is not objectionable to Owner.

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and

2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal”, which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.



D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents.

E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.05.

7.05 Substitutes

A. Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the Site.

1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other than Contractor.

2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances.

3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:

a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:

1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design,

2) be similar in substance to that specified, and

3) be suited to the same use as that specified.

b. will state:

1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times,

2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and

3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.

c. will identify:

1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and



2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.

d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change.

B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.

C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense.

F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal.

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner.

B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.

C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection.

D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days.



E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity.

F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement.

G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

H. On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.

I. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.

J. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work.

K. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed herein.

L. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.

M. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.

N. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the particular Subcontractor or Supplier.



O. Nothing in the Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; nor

2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.

C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.

7.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work



7.09 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work.

7.10 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.

7.11 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer.

7.12 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;



2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress.

C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work.

D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site.

E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).

F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).

G. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

7.13 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or



exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.

7.15 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals

A. Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements:

1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:

a. reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.

B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to



provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

2. Samples:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.

b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.

C. Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Specifications.

D. Engineer’s Review:

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.

3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order.

5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A and B.

6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order.

7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample, or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document.



8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4.

E. Resubmittal Procedures:

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.

2. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.

3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;

6. the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;

7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

8. any correction of defective Work by Owner.



D. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract.

7.18 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage.

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop



Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 7.16.D.1.

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer.

ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

8.01 Other Work

A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site.

B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor.

C. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected.

D. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work.



8.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work:

1. the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors;

2. an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination.

8.03 Legal Relationships

A. If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment shall take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this paragraph.

C. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor.



D. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference.

ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

9.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer.

9.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.

9.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

9.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement.

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings

A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01.

B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.

C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.

9.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6.

9.07 Change Orders

A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.



9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B.

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06.

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).

9.12 Safety Programs

A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed.

B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.

ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

10.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract.

10.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during



or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.

10.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set forth in Paragraph 7.16.

B. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in Paragraph 7.19.

C. Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11.

D. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.



B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any.

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which Engineer has been informed.

ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order.

1. Change Orders:

a. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. A Change Order also may be used to establish amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times.

b. Owner and Contractor may amend those terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, without the recommendation of the Engineer. Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

2. Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding change of Contract Price. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an



adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive.

3. Field Orders: Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein.

11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.

11.04 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); or

2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on



the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04.C).

C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.01.C.2.a and 11.01.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive.

11.05 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress.

11.06 Change Proposals

A. Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under



the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.

1. Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal.

2. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole, approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Such actions shall be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.

3. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12.

B. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.

11.07 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:

1. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive;

2. changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off;

3. changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters; and

4. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12.



B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed.

11.08 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change.

ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS

12.01 Claims

A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted to the Claims process set forth in this Article:

1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;

2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; and

3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters.

B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled.

C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.

D. Mediation:

1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim submittal and response process.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim



submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator.

3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs.

E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.

F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.

G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.

ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

13.01 Cost of the Work

A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:

1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or

2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment.

B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall include only the following items:

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable



thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.05), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes



other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.

D. Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C.

E. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.

13.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.



B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:

1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and

2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

13.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph.

E. Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease.



ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK

14.01 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.

B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05.

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required:

1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;

2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work;

3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;

4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and

5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.

Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.

F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to



cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.

14.03 Defective Work

A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective.

B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work.

C. Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.

D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.

E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work.

F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner.

14.05 Uncovering Work

A. Engineer has the authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.



B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense.

C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment.

1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.

2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective.

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.

C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will



include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.

ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD

15.01 Progress Payments

A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period.

B. Applications for Payments:

1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.

C. Review of Applications:

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:



a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid on account of the Contract Price, or

e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2.

6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or



e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents.

D. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

E. Reductions in Payment by Owner:

1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement;

b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site;

c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible;

e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;

f. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

h. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

i. an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause has occurred;

j. liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;

k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens;

l. there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount recommended.

2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount



remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction.

3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven days after the time of payment by Owner.

15.03 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.

D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work.



E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above.

F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list.

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:

1. At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through E for that part of the Work.

2. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance.

15.05 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.

15.06 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment:

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of



inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.

d. a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation shall account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment.

C. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment.

D. Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer (less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation,



including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions above with respect to progress payments) will become due and shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.

15.07 Waiver of Claims

A. The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05, from Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents.

B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.

15.08 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions:

1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas;

2. correct such defective Work;

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.



E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work.

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause:

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);

2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents;

3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or

4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.

B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract, Owner may proceed to:

1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) notice that the Contract is terminated; and

2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.

C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.

D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.

E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses,



and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.

F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.

G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and

3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead, profits, or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03.

B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for



expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph.

ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES

17.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this Article:

1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full; and

2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under the Contract Documents, and arising after final payment has been made.

B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article, Owner or Contractor may:

1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or

2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or

3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS

18.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if:

1. delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the sender of the notice.

18.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.

18.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.



18.04 Limitation of Damages

A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

18.05 No Waiver

A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.

18.06 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

18.07 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.

18.08 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.

[INSERT NAME OF DISTRICT] [INSERT PROJECT TITLE AND DATE]

Supplementary Conditions 00800

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, EJCDC C-700 (2013 Edition). All provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.

The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.

The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix “SC” added thereto.

Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology

SC-1.01 Defined Terms

Add to the list of definitions in Paragraph 1.01.A by inserting the following as numbered items in their proper alphabetical positions:

Final Completion – Owner’s acceptance of the Work upon confirmation from Engineer and Contractor that the Work is totally complete in accordance with Contract Documents.

Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 1.01.A.34, Schedule of Submittals:

…and is to be coordinated with the schedule provisions included in the General Requirements, if applicable.

Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 1.01.A.35, Schedule of Values:

…and is to be coordinated with the schedule provisions included in the General Requirements, if applicable.

SC-1.02 Terminology

Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 1.02.C:

2

…unless otherwise noted.

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters

SC-2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.04.A to read as follows:

Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, before any Work…

SC-2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules


Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, at least 10 days before…

Article 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse

SC-3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

Add the following new paragraph after Paragraph 3.03.B.1:

2. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be based on the following priorities:

a. Agreement,

b. Addenda, with those of later date having preference over those of earlier date,

c. Supplementary Conditions,

d. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract,

e. Drawings and Specifications. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with Engineer’s interpretation.

3

Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions

SC-5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

Add the following new paragraphs after Paragraph 5.03.B:

C. The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site are known to Owner:

1. None

CI. The following drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities) are known to Owner:

1. None

SC-5.04

SC-5.05

Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

Amend Paragraph 5.04.A, last paragraph, first line, to read as follows:

…then Contractor shall, no later than three (3) days after becoming aware thereof…

Underground Facilities

Amend Paragraph 5.05.B, third line, to read as follows:

4

…Contractor shall, no later than three (3) days after becoming aware thereof …

SC-5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions

Delete Paragraphs 5.06.A and 5.06.B in their entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site are known to Owner.

B. Not Used.

Article 6 - Bonds and Insurance

SC-6.01 Performance, Payment and Other Bonds

Add the following new paragraph to Paragraph 6.01.A:

In addition to the bonds described in Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions, Contractor shall provide to Owner a warranty bond executed by Contractor. Such warranty bond shall be subject to the requirements set forth in the General Conditions, except that it shall remain in effect for a period of two (2) years following Substantial Completion of the Project.

SC-6.03 Contractor’s Insurance

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.03.J:

K. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 6.03 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations:

1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs 6.03.A.1 and A.2 of the General Conditions:

State: Statutory Federal, if applicable (e.g., Longshoreman’s): Statutory Jones Act coverage, if applicable:

5

Bodily injury by accident, each accident $ Bodily injury by disease, aggregate $ Employer’s Liability: Bodily injury, each accident $ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease, each employee $ 1,000,000 Bodily injury/disease aggregate $ 2,000,000 For work performed in monopolistic states, stop-gap liability coverage shall be endorsed to either the worker’s compensation or commercial general liability policy with a minimum limit of: $ N/A Foreign voluntary worker compensation Statutory

2. Contractor’s Commercial General Liability under Paragraphs 6.03.B and 6.03.C of the General Conditions:

General Aggregate $ 2,000,000 Products - Completed Operations Aggregate $ 2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000 Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $ 1,000,000

3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 6.03.D. of the General Conditions:

Bodily Injury: Each person $ 1,000,000 Each accident $ 2,000,000 Property Damage: Each accident $ 1,000,000

6

Annual Aggregate $ 2,000,000

4. Excess or Umbrella Liability:

Per Occurrence $ 1,000,000 General Aggregate $ 2,000,000

5. Contractor’s Pollution Liability:

Each Occurrence $ General Aggregate $

If box is checked, Contractor is not required to provide Contractor’s Pollution Liability insurance under this Contract

6. Additional Insureds: In addition to Owner and Engineer, include as additional insureds the following: _______________

7. Contractor’s Professional Liability:

Each Claim $ Annual Aggregate $

SC-6.05 Property Insurance

Article 7 - Contractor’s Responsibilities

SC-7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others

Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 7.06.M:

, including but not limited to bonding, insurance, warranties, indemnities, progress payments and completion of performance requirements.

Add the following language at the beginning of Paragraph 7.06.N:

7

Upon receipt of progress and final payments from Owner, Contractor shall disburse the same immediately to subcontractors without any requirement of Owner to supervise the same.

SC-7.09 Taxes

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.09.A:

B. Owner is exempt from payment of sales and compensating use taxes of the State of Colorado and of municipalities and counties thereof on all materials to be incorporated into the Work.

1. Owner will, upon request, furnish the required certificates of tax exemption to Contractor for use in the purchase of supplies and materials to be incorporated into the Work.

2. Owner’s exemption does not apply to construction tools, machinery, equipment, or other property purchased by or leased by Contractor, or to supplies or materials not incorporated into the Work.

3. Owner will not reimburse Contractor for any sales or use taxes paid to the State or any county or municipality from which Owner or the Project are exempt.

SC-7.11 Record Documents

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.11.A:

B. Contractor shall provide to Engineer copies of all Daily Construction Reports (Logs) typically generated as the normal course of business by Contractor from Notice to Proceed through Final Completion. These Daily Construction Reports, along with other relevant Project documentation, will be utilized by Engineer in the event of a claim or dispute. The Daily Construction Reports from the previous week shall be delivered to Engineer on the following Monday, unless an alternative day is agreed to by Engineer. Contractor’s failure to provide the required Daily Construction Reports may cause

8

Engineer to not recommend monthly progress payments by Owner.

SC-7.12 Safety and Protection

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.12.G:

H. As provided in SC-14.06, Owner may stop the Work immediately if Owner observes a substantial violation of Paragraph 7.12.

SC-7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples and Other Submittals

Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 7.16.D.1 to read as follows:

Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer and shall be coordinated with the schedule provisions included in the General Requirements, if applicable.

SC-7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

Delete Paragraph 7.17.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. Contractor hereby represents, warrants and guarantees to Owner all workmanship, equipment and materials on or made a part of the Project for a period of two (2) years following Substantial Completion of the Project. Such warranty and guarantee shall be construed to include, but is not limited to, representations that all workmanship, equipment and materials are of good quality, free from any defects or irregularities, and in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall take all actions necessary to assign all warranties made by a vendor or manufacturer of equipment or materials made a part of the Project to Owner for Owner’s benefit. If any defect in workmanship, equipment or materials arises, Contractor shall remedy or otherwise correct such defect without cost to Owner within such reasonable period of time as specified by Owner in writing. If Contractor fails to repair such defect within such period of time as is specified by Owner, Owner may repair such defect or contract for such repairs at the expense of

9

Contractor and its surety. Contractor expressly declares that the performance and warranty bonds specified in Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions, as modified by SC-6.01, shall remain in full force and effect during the period of this warranty and guarantee, including any period necessary to remedy or otherwise correct any defects. Contractor shall provide such warranty and guarantee on Owner’s behalf separate and apart from and in addition to other warranties, guarantees and surety agreements entered into independently between Owner and any manufacturer or supplier.

SC-7.18 Indemnification

Delete Paragraph 7.18.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. Subject to Section 13-21-111.5(6), C.R.S., Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold Owner, and its officers, directors, employees, agents, engineers and attorneys, harmless from and against all costs, claims, damages, judgments, losses and expenses of every nature, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising at any time from any act or omission of Contractor, its employees, subcontractors and their employees, and all other persons directly or indirectly involved in or performing work for Contractor (other than Owner and any other third party while under the control or supervision of Owner) on the Project.

Article 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction

SC-10.03 Project Representative

Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.A:

B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will confer with Engineer regarding RPR's actions.

1. General: RPR’s dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general shall be with Engineer and Contractor. RPR’s dealings with Subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge and

10

approval of Contractor. RPR shall generally communicate with Owner only with the knowledge of and under the direction of Engineer.

2. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and consult with Engineer concerning acceptability.

3. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project- related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof.

4. Liaison:

a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents.

b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations.

c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for proper execution of the Work.

5. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer.

6. Shop Drawings and Samples:

a. Record date of receipt of Samples and Contractor-approved Shop Drawings.

b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and notify Engineer of availability of Samples for examination.

11

c. Advise Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal for which RPR believes that the submittal has not been approved by Engineer.

7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report such suggestions, together with RPR’s recommendations, if any, to Engineer. Transmit to Contractor in writing decisions as issued by Engineer.

8. Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work:

a. Conduct on-Site observations of Contractor’s work in progress to assist Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents.

b. Report to Engineer whenever RPR believes that any part of Contractor’s work in progress is defective, will not produce a completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents, or will imperil the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise Engineer of that part of work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval.

9. Inspections, Tests, and System Start-ups:

a. Verify that tests, equipment, and systems start- ups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate Owner’s personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records thereof.

12

b. Observe, record, and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the test procedures and systems start-ups.

10. Records:

a. Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, recording Contractor’s hours on the Site, Subcontractors present at the Site, weather conditions, data relative to questions of Change Orders, Field Orders, Work Change Directives, or changed conditions, Site visitors, deliveries of equipment or materials, daily activities, decisions, observations in general, and specific observations in more detail as in the case of observing test procedures; and send copies to Engineer.

b. Record names, addresses, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, web site locations, and telephone numbers of all Contractors, Subcontractors, and major Suppliers of materials and equipment.

c. Maintain records for use in preparing Project documentation.

11. Reports:

a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and of Contractor’s compliance with the Progress Schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals.

b. Draft and recommend to Engineer proposed Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain backup material from Contractor.

c. Immediately notify Engineer of the occurrence of any Site accidents, emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, force majeure or delay events, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the discovery of any Constituent of

13

Concern or Hazardous Environmental Condition.

12. Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work completed, and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work.

13. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that materials and equipment certificates, operation and maintenance manuals and other data required by the Contract Documents to be assembled and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have these documents delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to payment for that part of the Work.

14. Completion:

a. Participate in Engineer’s visits to the Site to determine Substantial Completion, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected.

b. Participate in Engineer’s final visit to the Site to determine completion of the Work, in the company of Owner and Contractor, and prepare a final punch list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be remedied.

c. Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning acceptance and issuance of the notice of acceptability of the work.

C. The RPR shall not:

14

1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment (including “or-equal” items).

2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents.

3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers.

4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of Contractor’s work.

5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of Owner or Contractor.

6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.

7. Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than Contractor.

8. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.

Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work

SC-11.04 Change of Contract Price

Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 11.04.B.3:

Contractor shall submit on a daily basis, or at an interval determined by Engineer, the actual costs for all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals utilized in the performance of the change for Engineer’s review. The format of the submittal shall be as determined by Engineer.

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 11.04.C:

15

D. This Paragraph 11.04 is subject to the change order requirements set forth in SC-11.07.

SC-11.07 Execution of Change Orders

Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 11.07.A.4:

5. A fully executed Change Order represents full and final settlement for all costs (including all impact costs) and time relating to the work included in the change order. The following language shall be typed on the face of each Change Order:

THIS CHANGE ORDER CONSTITUTES FULL AND FINAL SETTLEMENT FOR ALL COSTS AND TIME ASSOCIATED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED HEREIN. COSTS ARE DEFINED TO INCLUDE ALL DIRECT AND INDIRECT LABOR COSTS RELATED TO, AND/OR OCCASIONED BY THE WORK DESCRIBED HEREIN; ALL MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT COSTS RELATED HERETO; ANY AND ALL IMPACT COSTS RELATED TO AND/OR OCCASIONED BY THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS WORK; AS WELL AS ALL APPLICABLE TAXES, INSURANCE, BONDS, AND PROFIT. ALL OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS CONTRACT REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT.

6. The Contract Documents are subject to Section 24-91-103.6, C.R.S., and in accordance therewith:

a. Owner shall not issue any Change Order or other directive (other than a clarification) requiring additional compensable Work to be performed that will cause the aggregate amount payable under the Agreement to exceed the amount appropriated for the original Contract Price and any subsequent appropriations, unless:

1. Contractor is given written assurance by Owner that lawful appropriations to cover the costs of the additional Work have been made and are available prior to performance of the additional Work; or

2. The additional Work is covered by the following remedy-granting provision: Contractor may request, in writing, a letter from Owner explaining the expected

16

sources of funding for the additional Work. In the event Owner does not provide such written assurance reasonably satisfactory to Contractor within five (5) days of Contractor’s request, Contractor may stop Work until such time as Owner provides satisfactory assurances. Contractor’s acceptance of a Change Order in accordance with any assurances provided under this Paragraph shall not limit or restrict Contractor from making a Claim under the Contract Documents for an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damages directly attributable to Contractor’s stoppage of the Work as permitted hereunder.

b. For any Change Order or other directive (other than a clarification) that requires additional compensable Work to be performed, Owner shall reimburse Contractor for Contractor’s costs on the periodic basis set forth in the Contract Documents for all additional directed Work performed until the Change Order is finalized. In no instance shall the periodic reimbursement be required before Contractor has submitted an estimate of cost to Owner for the additional compensable Work to be performed.

c. If the Work is financed in whole or in part by a federal grant, any provision of this Paragraph 11.07.A.6. that is in conflict with the terms of such grant shall be inapplicable.

Article 12 – Claims

SC-12.01 Claims

Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 12.01.B. to read as follows:

The party submitting a claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than seven (7) days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within seven (7) days of the decision under appeal.

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 12.01.B:

Owner shall give notice to the Surety of any Claim that Owner might assert against Contractor on the performance bond or the payment bond, unless

17

waived in writing by the Surety. Owner’s act of giving such notice or failure to give such notice shall not affect Owner’s right to seek or pursue any remedy provided for in such bonds or under any other provisions of the Contract Documents. This provision does not modify Contractor’s obligations to provide notification to the Surety under the General Conditions.

Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 12.01.G:

H. Referral of Claims to Design Professional: No claim or defense of Owner shall be barred for failure to refer an item of dispute to Engineer. Owner and Contractor agree that any requirement in the Contract Documents to refer a claim to Engineer or any other party as a condition precedent to exercising any lawful remedies shall not be a bar to bringing an action in a court of competent jurisdiction if Owner or Contractor has a reasonable belief that complying with such referral requirement might jeopardize its ability to exercise such remedies due to the running of the applicable statute of limitations or the application of an equitable defense such as waiver, estoppel or laches. Promptly following the filing of an action under such circumstances, Owner and Contractor shall then proceed to comply with such claim referral process to the extent not stayed by a court of competent jurisdiction.

I. Two-Year Statute of Limitations: Any claim or action at law or in equity upon or arising out of the Contract Documents or the Work performed thereunder (except for a state action based in tort, which shall be subject to the Colorado Governmental Immunity Act, § 24- 10-101 et seq., C.R.S.) which is asserted by Contractor against Owner shall be commenced within two (2) years from the date when such claim or action accrued pursuant to Section 13-80-102(1)(h), C.R.S., or such claim or action shall thereafter be barred.

Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work

SC-13.01 Cost of the Work

Delete Paragraph 13.01.B.4 in its entirety.

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 13.01.C.5:

18

6. The cost of special consultants (including engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys and accountants) shall not be included in any cost of the Work or otherwise be the obligation of Owner, unless specified in the bidding documents or approved in advance by Owner in its sole discretion.

SC-13.03 Unit Price Work

Delete Paragraph 13.03.E.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor results in an actual overrun or underrun of 25% of the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;

Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work

SC-14.06 Owner May Stop the Work

Add the following language to the beginning of Paragraph 14.06.A:

If Owner observes a substantial violation of Paragraph 7.12, or…

Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period

SC-15.01 Progress Payments


A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments, unless modified in the schedule provisions contained in the General Requirements, and will be incorporated …

SC-15.06 Final Payment

Add the following language after the last sentence of Paragraph 15.06.D:

Owner shall, no later than fourteen (14) days before final payment is made, publish a notice of final payment at least twice in a legal

19

newspaper of general circulation in any county where the work was contracted for or performed pursuant to Section 38-26-107, C.R.S. The requirements set forth in Section 38-26-107 C.R.S. are incorporated into this Paragraph 15.06 and shall control in the event of any conflict with the Contract Documents.

SC-15.08 Correction Period


A. If within two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion…

Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes

SC-17.01 Methods and Procedures

Add the new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01.B:

C. Any mediation or arbitration provision in the Contract Documents shall be optional and subject to the mutual consent of Owner and Contractor, each in their sole discretion. Compliance with any mediation or arbitration procedure shall not be a pre-requisite to bringing an action in a court of competent jurisdiction.

Special conditions – Page 1

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Town of Gypsum

Wastewater Treatment Plant

Lift Station Upgrade

DESCRIPTION The work to be performed generally includes: The construction of an upgrade to the Town of Gypsum Wastewater Treatment Plant Main Lift Station. This will include the partial demolition of the existing building as necessary for the construction of the building addition and new roof structure. Work will also include the installation of a new duplex pump skid (supplies by others) and all necessary piping to connect the new pump intake piping to the existing wet well and to connect the new pump discharge piping to the existing manhole adjacent to the building site. Piping work will also include all piping additions and revisions to reroute/replace the intake and discharge piping from the existing dual pump skid. Work will include the construction and installation of all other related mechanical and electrical equipment necessary for a complete and properly functioning lift station. The contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment and material for the complete construction of the project as shown on the plans and called for in the specifications, including any special technical or construction assistance which may be required. ADDITIONAL ITEMS 1. CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS: Construction specifications for this project shall be: Technical Specifications as included with these contract documents. Public Works Manual - Town of Gypsum

Wherever specifications from multiple jurisdictions may apply, the most restrictive shall govern.

2. WARRANTY:

The contractor shall warranty all work for a period of two (2) years, see Section 13 of the Agreement and Article 5.01 of the General Conditions.


3. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:

Contractor shall be required to have insurance coverage as described in the Section 5.2, 5.3, and 5.4 of the General Conditions. In addition, the Contractor shall be required to have insurance coverage as required by Section 5.11 of the Regulations for Construction within the Public Way of Eagle County.

4. EXISTING UTILITIES:

Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining locations for all underground utilities in the construction areas. The Contractor shall make such investigations as he deems necessary to verify the actual field conditions. The Contractor shall take sole responsibility for damage to any utility line encountered whether or not located on the drawings, as well as paying for the cost of fines and /or revenue lost by a utility company resulting from outages. The Contractor shall notify the utility companies for field locations before the start of construction. No change in the Contract Price will be allowed for deflecting utilities up or down to clear a proposed improvement. Similarly, no change in the Contract Price will be allowed for supporting utilities along the trench wall when utilities may remain in essentially their current location. Alignment and depth of the new pipelines may be varied to minimize conflicts with existing utilities with the approval of the Engineer.

The protection of all existing utilities is the responsibility of the contractor. The cost incurred to repair damaged utilities shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

5. CONSTRUCTION STAKING:

Owner will not provide construction stakes establishing lines, slopes, or benchmarks because this project consists of construction tying into existing structures matching to these structures will control.

6. TESTING:

Compaction Testing:

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing compaction tests and results from an independent, reputable testing company for all compacted subgrade, fill and aggregate road base material. The minimum required number of satisfactory tests are defined below for each type of construction. All costs for retesting of failed areas shall be the contractor's responsibility.

Structural Fill One test per 10,000 sq. ft. for Material each two vertical feet of fill


Utility Trenches One test per 200 lineal feet for the lower 12 inches of fill and each 24 inches of fill thereafter. Concrete Testing:

Tests shall be conducted to determine whether the concrete, as being produced,complies with the standards of quality specified in these Specifications. TheContractor is not relieved of the responsibility of proper placing and curing eventhoughtestreportsindicateadequatestrengths.

TestsshallbeinaccordancewithapplicableASTMsections.Testsshallbeperformed

forCompressiveStrength,Slump,EntrainedAir,andTemperature. One(1)testspecimenshallbebrokenatseven(7)days,two(2)shallbebrokenat

twenty‐eight(28)days,andtheremainingspecimenheldinreserveorbrokenuponrequest by the Engineer. Theminimum28‐day compressive strength of concreteshallbe4,000psi.

UnlessotherwiserequiredbytheEngineerorprovidedforintheseSpecifications,all

defective materials, equipment, and work shall be promptly reworked, repaired,removed,orreplaced.Thedefectivematerials,equipment,orworkshallbere‐testedto the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall perform all such actionsnecessarytocorrectdefectivematerials,equipment,orworkatnoadditionalcosttotheOwner.ActionsrequiredbyContractorshallbeasoutlinedbeloworasdescribedelsewhereintheseSpecifications.

All retesting of material previously failed, and all actions necessary for concrete

coring,additionalconcretecuring,andcorrectionofdefectivematerials,equipmentorworkshallbeperformedatnoadditionalcosttotheOwner.

7. SOILS REPORT: No soils report is available for this project. 8. RESTORATION AND REVEGETATION:

Restoration shall consist of restoring the grade to match the pre-construction grade except around structures and where surface drainage is necessary and at other locations as approved by the engineer. Revegetation shall consist of hydro mulching all disturbed areas with a seed mixture submitted for approval by the Town.

9. LAND, RIGHTS-OF-WAYS, AND EASEMENTS:


All land, right-of-way, and easements required for actual construction under this contract have been acquired by the OWNER. Should the CONTRACTOR require use of any right-of-way across any other lands, he shall obtain written approval of the respective owners and he shall take sole responsibility for all restoration of such lands to the satisfaction of the respective owners.

All of the construction activities associated with this project takes place on the site of the Town of Gypsum Wastewater Treatment Plant property which is owned by the Town of Gypsum.

10. COORDINATION: Contractor will be required to coordinate pipeline connections with

the Town of Gypsum, and equipment installation with Gorman Rupp/Canyon Systems. 11. PROJECT COMPLETION: The project shall be substantially complete by

______________ (or other date based on days in Agreement). Substantial completion shall include all contract items excepting revegetation and final connections and communications necessary for complete meter operation. Liquidated damages shall be assessed after that date at a rate of $250.00 per day.

12. DISTURBED AREAS: The area disturbed shall be limited to the minimum necessary for

construction. In addition, erosion control measures will be required. 13. ACCESS to the project shall be via the existing driveway to the Wastewater Plant. 14. SHOP DRAWINGS

General: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Engineer for review. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions Section 6.17: Required Material and Shop Drawing Submittals:

Submittals are required to be delivered to the Engineer no less than 14 days prior

to being required for construction. Minimum required submittals include the following:

1 Erosion protection/sediment control plan

2 Record Drawings

3 Test Results

4 HDPE Pipe ‐ Product data

5 HDPE Pipe ‐ Fusion Certifications


6 HDPE Pipe ‐ Fusion Procedure

7 Ductile Iron Pipe ‐ Product data

8 Piping appurtenances ‐ valves/fittings/etc. product data

9 Piping supports ‐ shop drawings

10 Building ‐ truss design (if applicable)

11 Building ‐ roofing product data

12 Building ‐ siding product data

13 Building ‐ personnel and roll up door product data

14 Building ‐ paint ‐ exterior/interior/trim

15 Building ‐ HVAC product data

16 Building ‐ lighting product data

17 Building ‐ Concrete mix design

18 Site Reclamation Plan

19 Misc. Metal Work ‐ shop drawings

15. AS-BUILTS: Contractor will be required to provide as constructed locations and elevations of all parts of the project prior to final payment.

16. BYPASS PUMPING PLAN: Contractor will be required to provide an emergency bypass

pumping plan and related equipment to ensure that wastewater flows will never be interrupted. Specific requirements are contained in Technical Specification 02530.

17. EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS: Attached to these Special Conditions, at the

end of the section, is the proposal of equipment and services to be provided by Gorman Rupp/Canyon Systems. All other equipment, materials, and services shall be provided by the contractor.

PROPOSAL/CONTRACT

CD000127* 10/15 Page 1 of 5

The Gorman-Rupp Company 600 South Airport Road Mansfield, OH 44903 Phone: (419) 755-1011

Purchaser: Town of Gypsum For: Town of Gypsum WWTP

P.O. Box 130 Influent Lift Station

Gypsum, CO 81637

Attn: Jim Hancock: 970-524-1728 Proposal No. 05G01.18Q Rev. A

Note: Our Contract includes the provisions set forth below and the Terms and Conditions on the final page hereof, including without

limitation the reservation of security interest and warranty liability and price escalation clause. The information or data contained in the Proposal/Contract is proprietary to The Gorman-Rupp Company and should not be copied, reproduced, duplicated, or disclosed to any third party, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of The Gorman-Rupp Company. The Gorman-Rupp Company will not be bound by any Terms and Conditions other than those identified in this Proposal/Contract, nor shall The Gorman-Rupp Company be liable for any liquidated damages or be a party to or bound by the terms and conditions of any other contract documents.

STATION TYPE Station Type ..................................................................... AX

“AX” Description:

Complete packaged pump station including pump control panel, engines(s) and additional items as described in

the quotation below. The pump unit is comprised of pumps, motors and engine(s) as described below.

NOTES: This quote request is the same scope as quote 04G01.18Q but has VFDs instead of VFNR starters.

PUMP · MOTOR · BASE Pump Model #1 ............................................................... T6A3S-B /WW

Quantity ..................................................................... 2

Condition Point ......................................................... 900 GPM @ 30’ TDH

High Pump Temp Sensor .......................................... Included, 1 Per Pump

Motor Information

Horsepower ................................................................ 20

Voltage ...................................................................... 3/60/460

Enclosure ................................................................... TEFC - Premium Efficient

Engine Drive Configuration ...................................... Left (LH Drive)

Engine Fuel ................................................................ NG

Number of Autostart engines included ...................... Qty 1

Note: 16 week lead time for TEFC Double Shaft Motor

PIPING & VALVES Suction Piping

Size ............................................................................ 6" Pump Flange

Discharge Check Valve

Size ............................................................................ 6"

Type ........................................................................... Standard Swing Check

Air Release Valve [318] .................................................. GRP33-07A

Discharge Isolation Valve(s)

Valve Size .................................................................. 6"

Valve Type ................................................................ 3-Way Plug

Valve Operator .......................................................... Manual Lever

Customer Discharge Header Connection ..................... GR piping shall stop at plug valve

Suction & Discharge Gauge Kit [307] ............................. 0'-70', Qty 1 for each pump

CD000127* 10/15 Page 2 of 5

Pump Drain Kit [304] ....................................................... Drain Kit w/10' Hose

Piping & Valves Notes:

Discharge of header to be positioned between (center) of the pumps .

CONTROL PANEL

Voltage Available at Site .................................................. 3/60/460

UL / CSA Listing ............................................................. UL Control Panel

Control Voltage Transformer [404] .................................. 750 VA

Control panel transformer mounting ......................... Inside the control panel

Control Panel SCCR Rating ............................................. 10 kA rms sym

Duplex Receptacle(s) In Control Panel [421] ................... None

Primary Motor Starter .................................................. VFD

Motor starter manufacturer ........................................ Allen-Bradley 753

VFD Speed Reference ............................................... Ethernet

Control Panel Enclosure

Dimensions ................................................................ 60 H x 60“W x 12“D with Forced Air Circ.

NEMA Rating ............................................................ NEMA 1

Material ..................................................................... Painted Steel

Mounting ................................................................... Shipped Loose on Floor Stands

Elapsed Time Meters ........................................................ Display ETM of each Pump on controller OIT

Station Low Temp Alarm [414] ....................................... Fixed thermostat

Control Panel Heater 60w [420] ....................................... Included

TVSS-Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor [424] ............ Included

High Pump Temp Shutdown Protection ........................... Included

Diameter of selector switches ........................................... 22.5 mm (Standard)

Diameter of indicating lights ............................................ 22.5 mm (Standard)

Control Panel Notes:

This control panel will operate the pumps in station 98-583-AX. Hardware to be included in this control panel so

it can operate the FVNR starters and monitor the HPSTs from station 98-583-AX. The AX engine in 98-583-AX

will only be operated in a manual mode. Control of the AX engine in pump station 98-583-AX is not in the scope

of this quotation.

LEVEL CONTROL

Primary Level Controller [405] ..................................... PLC

Primary PLC Model .................................................. A-B CompactLogix L2

Primary Operator Interface ........................................ A-B PanelView Plus 7 1000 (10" Color Screen)

Primary Level Control Sensor [406] ............................. Air Bubbler

Primary Sequence of Operation:

The PLC shall run the T4 pumps in station 98-583-AX first and if the level in the wet well continues to riser the

following sequence of operation will begin. The PLC shall start the motor for one pump when the Liquid Level in

the wet well is raised to the "Lead Pump Start Level". When the Liquid is lowered to the "Lead Pump Stop

Level", the PLC shall stop this pump. These actions shall constitute one pumping cycle. Should the wet well level

continue to rise, the PLC shall start additional pumps when their respective "ON" set points are reached.

When a single pump is running and the wet well is equal to the “1 pump minimum level”, the drive will run at the

“1 pump minimum speed”. As the level rises, drive speed will increase to the “1 pump maximum speed” when

the wet well level is equal to the “1 pump maximum level”. Likewise, when additional pumps are running, the

previous settings will be disabled and the control will use the level and speed settings for the respective number

of pumps running.

Backup Level Control AC or AX .................................. Run AC pumps and AutoStart pump(s)

Backup Level Controller ........................................ PLC

Backup PLC Model ............................................ MicroLogix 1100

jim

Text Box

,

CD000127* 10/15 Page 3 of 5

Backup Operator Interface ......................................... Option 1 - Operator Interface for independent

redundant PLC

Backup Level Sensor ...................................................... Floats (Non-Intrinsically safe)

Backup Float Information .......................................... Float Name Cable Length

High Water Level 50

T4 Pumps Off T6 On (Ac Or

Dc)

50

T4 Lag On 50

T4 On 50

All Pumps Off 50

Backup Sequence of Operation:

PLC shall start the motor for one pump when the liquid level in the wet well is raised to the "Lead Pump Start

Level". When the liquid is lowered to the "Lead Pump Stop Level", the controller shall stop this pump. These

actions shall constitute one pumping cycle. Should the wet well level continue to rise, the controller shall start

additional pumps when their respective "ON" set points are reached.

Should the wet well level continue to rise, the controller shall signal a high wet well level. After loss of power,

pumps and shall restart on return of power.

Backup Level Control Notes:

Backup level control option 1 - Independent redundant PLC with I.S. submersible floats. Capable of running T4

pumps in station 98-583-AX when AC power is available. Also capable of running T6 pumps in this station when

AC power is available and the AX engine when only DC power is available.

Backup level control option 2 - Independent redundant PLC with I.S. submersible transducer (50’ Cable) and 4"

operator interface - Functionality same as backup level control option #1.

PLC INFORMATION External Source Wired to Terminal Blocks ...................... External Source Output Name

Pump Fail #1 (T4)

Pump Fail #2 (T4)

Pump Fail #3 (T6)

Pump Fail #4 (T6)

Low Water Alarm (Bubbler)

High Water Alarm (Bubbler)

Phase Failure

Pump Station Low Temp

PLC Communication Method........................................... Requirements for SCADA communication has not

been submitted by Canyon Systems to be included in

the scope of this quotation. SCADA communication/

configuration will be an extra charge and will need to

be quoted.

Remote Communication (Troubleshooting) ..................... No hardware will be provided to facilitate remote

communications for troubleshooting and diagnostic

assistance.

LEAD TIME & PRICING

NOTES:

CD000127* 10/15 Page 4 of 5

1. One day, one trip included for start-up, inspection and training.

2. System supplied with MISSION MyDro M850 wireless alarm monitoring unit and includes three years

of monitoring service (shipped loose for wall mounting in field by others).

3. No other equipment or services other than those specifically listed in this quotation are provided. No

installation or labor is included in this scope. For additional information or questions please contact

Canyon Systems, Inc. at 303-987-3838

This quotation includes only equipment specifically mentioned herein and does not include, or infer inclusion of

any additional piping, valves, wiring, etc., regardless of its relation to the quoted equipment. Discounts or

commissions normally applied to the appropriate type of equipment also apply to these prices. Prices and

estimated delivery dates are subject to change without notice in the event that vendors fail to maintain their

quoted price and time of delivery to The Gorman-Rupp Company.

Estimated Submittal Time: ................................................ 6-8 Weeks

Estimated Production Time*: ............................................ 20-22 Weeks

* Estimated production time is based on either "approval- waived" submittals or submittal "approval" with no

revisions required at time of release- to- production. If revisions to the station/ controls are required prior to

release- to- production, add two- three weeks to the estimated production time frame.

Backup Level Control Option 2 System Price: ................. $ 136,471.00

Shipping: ........................................................................... Included to 1st destination

To purchase this equipment at the price offered herein, please sign two original Proposal/Contracts and return both originals to the aforementioned address. Upon acceptance of this Proposal/Contract, The Gorman-Rupp Company will execute this Contract and return one fully executed original for your records. Any use by the Purchaser of the price offered herein shall be deemed acceptance by the Purchaser of this Proposal/Contract including all of it Terms and Conditions.

Accepted this ______ day of ____________, 2018 Submitted this 22nd day of January, 2018

Purchaser:__________________________________

Authorized Distributor of the Gorman-Rupp Company: Canyon Systems, Inc.

Company Name

By: _______________________________________ By: ________________________________________ Authorized Signature Authorized Signature

Print Name: ________________________________ Print Name: Gragg White

Title: ______________________________________ Title: President

jim

Text Box

23rd

jim

Text Box

January

jim

Text Box

Town of Gypsum

jim

Text Box

Jim Hancock

jim

Hancock Signature

jim

Line

jim

Text Box

Authorized Signature

jim

Text Box

Town Engineer

CD000127* 10/15 Page 5 of 5

The Gorman-Rupp Company TERMS AND CONDITIONS

PROPOSAL DRAWING and bulletin illustrations are submitted to show general arrangement and approximate dimensions. The Company reserves the right to make such changes in details of design, construction or arrangement of equipment as in its judgment constitute as improvement. Engineering, dimensional and instruction data shall be furnished to the purchaser promptly after acceptance of the proposal for approval. Changes in layout design requested by purchaser after acceptance of proposal will be made at purchaser’s expense and may result in a potential change in estimated submittal and/or lead time quoted. The Gorman-Rupp Company will supply the products as described in this Proposal/Contract (hereinafter the “Scope of Supply”). The products supplied will conform to the Scope of Supply and any modifications thereto as contained in the submittals approved by the project engineer and as received by The Gorman-Rupp Company. The equipment, apparatus and parts furnished are WARRANTED against defects in materials and workmanship. Specific applicable warranty is available at www.grpumps.com/warranty. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS, SHALL EXIST AS TO ANY EQUIPMENT OR GOODS COVERED HEREBY, ALL SUCH WARRANTIES BEING EXPRESSLY WAIVED BY THE PURCHASER. The Company will, at its option, repair or replace any equipment or part which proves defective under its warranty provided that the purchaser notifies the Company in writing of such defect within the applicable warranty period and provided further that after start-up service has been performed, the labor to replace accessory items, such as sump pumps, dehumidifiers, relays or alternators, etc., shall be the responsibility of the owner’s maintenance personnel. The foregoing states the purchaser’s sole remedy for any breach of warranty by the Company. PRICE ESCALATION CLAUSE: Quoted prices are firm for sixty (60) days subject to an escalation not to exceed 5% for the following sixty (60) days and 1-1/2% per month thereafter. Orders accepted by The Gorman-Rupp Company will be held firm if the orders are approved and released for production within sixty (60) days provided shipment is accepted by the customer immediately following completion of production. Orders accepted by The Gorman-Rupp Company where production release or shipment is delayed by the customer beyond (60) days following acceptance of order by The Gorman-Rupp Company, prices will be subject to an escalation not exceed 1-1/2% per month until again released. Price escalation will not exceed Federal guidelines. THE AMOUNT OF ANY APPLICABLE TAX or other Government charge upon the production, sales, shipment and/or use of the equipment covered by this quotation shall be added to the price and shall be paid by the purchaser. ALL ORDERS SHALL BE MADE OUT toThe Gorman-Rupp Company; 600 South Airport Road; Mansfield, Ohio and shall be subject to acceptance by the Company. ORDER MAY BE CANCELED ONLY with the Company’s written consent and ON TERMS that will indemnify the Company against loss. Cancellation fees shall be assessed in an amount equal to 50% of the Proposal/Contract amount after acceptance of the proposal for approval and/or purchaser receives submittal information; 100% of the Proposal/Contract amount after acceptance of the proposal for approval and/or verbal written approval release for production. Performance of any contract by the Company shall be contingent upon credit approval, strikes, fires, accidents, war reduced supply of fuel or raw materials, or other restraints affecting shipments or curtailments in manufacturing or due to delays unavoidable or beyond the control of the Company. THE COMPANY SHALL NOT, in any event, be liable for indirect, special, consequential or liquidated damages or penalties, whether based upon contract, warranty, tort or negligence. When purchaser asks that equipment be warehoused or held for a stated or indefinite period after the equipment is ready for shipment, it is expressly understood and agreed that billing will be accepted as of the date when the equipment is ready for shipment and that STORAGE CHARGES (NOT TO EXCEED 1-1/2% PER MONTH) will apply thirty (30) days from that date. Unless otherwise specified, DELIVERIES QUOTED are figured from the date of release to production. Statements as to expected shipment dates from the factory represent the Company’s best judgment. Purchaser hereby waives all claim to damage caused by delay in shipment or delivery. Unless otherwise specified, TERMS are Net 45 days from date of invoice, F.O.B., Mansfield, Ohio with freight allowed to the job site or first destination, whichever is applicable. All terms of credit are subject to the Company’s approval and are independent of and not contingent upon the time and manner in which the purchaser may receive payment from others. Purchaser shall be notified of any changes in credit terms prior to acceptance of order. ANY INDEBTEDNESS OWING TO THE COMPANY for a period longer than (30) days shall BEAR INTEREST until paid at the current prime rate. If the Company finds it necessary to place any indebtedness hereunder in the hands of an attorney for collection, purchaser shall pay all expenses and costs of collection, including reasonable attorney’s fees. THE PROVISIONS on the face hereof and these Terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement among the parties and supersede the provisions of any purchase order, other communication between the parties or any statement or representation not included herein. This Agreement may not be modified or amended except in writing signed by the parties intended to be bound thereby. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Ohio.

http://www.grpumps.com/warranty

20 5/8 16 7/8

47 7/8

7/8

9/16 " DIA. ~ 8 HOLES

72

6

28 3/8

A

B

C

366

11 5/8

117

129 1/2

36 633

27 1/2

54 3/4

32

50 5/8

L

LVALVE

6"

8" 9"

8"

PUMP #2

1

PUMP #1

8

11

10

9

765

3

4

2

AIR FLOW

MANSFIELD, OHIO ST. THOMAS, ONTARIO

SYM. DATE RECORD DR. CK.

REVISIONS

D

GORMAN-RUPP

R

CHK.

NAME

APP. DATE

SERIAL NO.

THE GORMAN-RUPP CO.

DRN.

STANDBY PUMP UNIT

T6A-B, 6" X 6" X 6"

AS SHOWN

46186005.S01

BASE MOUNTED DUPLEX WITH SIMPLEX

STANDBY, T6A-B PUMPS

WC BM BM 1-30-02

ITEM DESCRIPTION MATERIAL & SIZE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

PUMP CAST IRON T6A-B

PUMP & MOTOR BASE ASSY STEEL

BELT GUARD ASSY STEEL

DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE CAST IRON

CONTROL PANEL STEEL

DISCHARGE PLUG VALVE CAST IRON 3-WAY

AIR RELEASE VALVE FIBERGLASS 1 1/4 "(SHIPPED LOOSE)

CAST IRON

ENGINE (NISSAN)

EXHAUST SILENCER STAINLESS STEEL 2" O.D.

MOTOR CAST IRON

PLUMBING

SUCT. DISCH. HDR.A B C

6" 6" 6" 59 1/4 "74 1/8 "28 1/4 "

6" 6" 8" 60 1/4 "77" 30 3/8 "

NOTE:

CONTROL PANEL ATTACHED TO BASE FOR

SHIPPING ONLY, FASTENERS TO BE REMOVED

AFTER INSTALLATION. PANEL TO BE

ANCHORED TO CONCRETE PAD.

6" 8" 8" 67 7/8 "84 5/8 "30 3/8 "

LEFT HAND DRIVE UNIT

WL-0531746186-005

56 3/4 MAX.

WATER COOLED

1 1/4 " DISCHARGE

A 3-4-09 ITEM #6 WAS CAST IRON 1" EB BM



INDEX TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NOT FOUND IN TOWN OF GYPSUM PUBLIC WORKS MANUAL

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01330 – SUBMITTALS DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK SECTION 02510 – HDPE PIPE (SOLID WALL) SECTION 02530 – BYPASS PUMPING DIVISION 5 – METALS SECTION 05500 – MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK DIVISIONS 7, 8, AND 9 SECTION 07050 – CAULKING AND SEALING SECTION 08100 – DOORS SECTION 09900 – PAINTING DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11005 – GENERAL EQUIPMENT DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL SECTION 15200 – PROCESS PIPING SECTION 15215 – VALVES, METERS, AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15700 – HVAC DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 1600 – GENERAL

SECTION 1604 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 1611 – GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 1613 – CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS SECTION 1615 – WIRE CONNECTORS AND DEVICES SECTION 1620 – INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 1644 – DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 1647 – PANELBOARDS SECTION 1652 - SURGE ARRESTORS AND TVSS DEVICES SECTION 1699 – FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTING

Zancanella&Associates,Inc. Submittals–01330 Page1

DIVISION1

SECTION01330

SUBMITTALSPART1‐GENERAL1‐1 SECTIONINCLUDES

A. RequirementsandproceduresforprovidingsubmittalstotheEngineer.1‐2 GENERAL

A. Submittalrequirementsaredescribedintheindividualspecificationsection.This section is intended to provide general guidelines for submittalsubmissionandresubmissionprocedures.

B. Schedule and make submissions in accordance with the requirements of

eachindividualSpecificationsectioninanorderastonotcausedelayintheproject.

C. The Contractor is required to make all specified submittals. Detailed

submittal requirements are provided in the referenced Specificationsections.

D. Do not perform work, deliver materials, or begin fabrication for items

relatedtosubmittalsthathavenotbeenapprovedbytheEngineer.E. Submittals shall confirm conformance of materials or products with the

Specificationsandreferencedstandards.F. TheEngineershallreviewandpreparearesponsetotheContractorwithin7

daysofreceiptoftheSubmittalorresubmission.G. No adjustment of the contract time or price will be allowed due to the

Engineer’sreviewofSubmittalswithinthegiven7‐daytimeperiodordelaysinWorkcausedbytherejectionandsubsequentresubmissionofSubmittals,includingmultipleresubmissions.

H. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all guarantees, warranties,

certificates, and delivery tickets as required by the Specifications, or asprovidedbytheproductmanufacturer,andpriortofinalacceptanceoftheWork.

1‐3 SUBMITTALREQUIREMENTS

A. IdentifyeachSubmittalwith thesequentialnumbering. ResubmissionofaSubmittalshallhavetheoriginalnumberwithasequentialalphabeticsuffix.

Zancanella&Associates,Inc. Submittals–01330 Page2

B. Eachsubmittalshallshowtheprojecttitle,Contractor,Specificationsectionto which submittal applies, date of submission and provide a briefdescription of the submittal item. Identify and indicate all proposedvariationsfromtheSpecifications.

C. TheContractorshallprovidetheEngineerwith3copiesofeachSubmittalor

resubmission.PART 2‐PRODUCTS Notused.PART3‐EXECUTION Notused.

‐EndofSection01330–

Zancanella & Associates, Inc. HDPE Pipe (Solid Wall) – 02510 March 2013 Page 1

DIVISION 2

SECTION 2510

HDPE PIPE (SOLID WALL) PART 1 – GENERAL 1-1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This specification defines the requirements for furnishing and installing solid-wall HDPE pipe and pipe fittings.

1-2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. ASTM A193: Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for

High Temperature Service. B. ASTM A194: Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High

Pressure and High Temperature Service. C. ASTM A240: Specification for Chromium and Chromium –Nickel Stainless Steel

Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels and General Applications D. ASTM D638: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics E. ASTM D790: Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and

Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials F. ASTM D1238: Standard Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by

Extrusion Plastometer G. ASTM D1248: Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

for Wire and Cable H. ASTM D1505: Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient

Technique I. ASTM D1603: Standard Test Method for Carbon Black in Olefin Plastics J. ASTM D1693: Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene

Plastics K. ASTM D2657: Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and

Fittings. L. ASTM D2774: Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

Pressure Piping.

Zancanella&Associates,Inc. HDPEPipe(SolidWall)–02510March2013 Page2

M. ASTM D3261: Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene Plastic Fittings for PolyethlyenePlasticPipeandTubing

N. ASTM D3350: Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings

MaterialsO. ASTM F1473: Standard Test Method for Notch Tensile Test to Measure the

ResistancetoSlowCrackGrowthofPolyethylenePipesandResinsP. PlasticsPipeInstitute(PPI):EngineeringPropertiesofPolyethyleneQ. PlasticPipeInstitute(PPI):HandbookofPolyethylenePipeR. AWWAC906:AWWAStandardforPolyethylenePressurePipeandFittings,4inch

through63inchforWaterDistribution.

1‐2 SUBMITTALS A. HDPE Pipe Product Data shall be submitted to the Engineer fourteen (14) days

before delivery to the site in accordance with Section 01330: Submittals. Thesubmittal shall include manufacturer and product data for the pipe, fittings, andspecials, including certificates of compliance, furnished by the manufacturer,certifyingthatthematerialscomplywiththerequirementsspecified.

B. Allfusionofpolyethylenepipeshallbeperformedbypersonsqualifiedinaccordance

with US Department of Transportation Specification Section 192.285. HDPE PipefusioncertificationsandqualificationsshallbesubmittedtotheEngineer fourteen(14)daysbeforecommencingfusingoperationsinaccordancewithSection01330:Submittals.

C. TheContractorshallprepareandsubmittotheEngineerawrittenprocedureforbutt

fusionof thepolyethylenepipeand fittings. Theprocedureshall includeadetaileddescription of the procedure (time periods, fusion temperatures, andpressures) aswellasadescriptionofqualifiedpersonnelandproposedequipmenttobeused.Theprocedure will also include proposed QA/QC procedures. The procedure shall bequalified by the pipe and fitting manufacturer and submitted to the Engineer forapprovalinaccordancewithSection01330:Submittals.

D. Hydrostatic Test Procedure: The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Plan or

Proceduretobefollowedtoperformthehydrostaticleaktesting,andsubmitthisPlanorProcedure to theEngineer for approval. Theplan should follow theproceduresrecommended by the pipe manufacturer and in conformance with the proceduredescribed in PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe ‐ Inspections, Test, and SafetyConsiderations.

PART2‐PRODUCTS2‐1 PIPE

A. HDPEPipeshallbeDuctileIronPipeSize(DIPS)andmeetthefollowingcriteria:


Material Property Specification Nominal Property Value Dimension Ratio (DR) 17 Material Designation PPI / ASTM PE4710/PE3408 Material Classification ASTM D1248 III C 5 P34 Cell Classification ASTM D3350 445474C Density ASTM D1505 0.959 g/cm3 Melt Index ASTM D1238 0.10 gm/10min. Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 110,000 < 160,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,400 < 4,000 psi PENT ASTM F1473 > 500 hours HDB @ 73°F ASTM D1693 1,600 psi HDB @ 140°F ASTM D1693 1,000 psi UV Stabilizer ASTM D1603 2.0 to 2.5 % B. Pipe shall be suitable for joining by butt fusion, saddle fusion, socket fusion or

electrofusion in accordance with the manufacturers recommended procedures. The personnel operating the fusion joining equipment and the on-site inspector shall be trained by the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized representative.

2-2 FITTINGS

A. HDPE Fittings shall be manufactured from the same resin type, grade, and cell classification as the pipe, and conforming to the same physical properties and as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density and other physical properties. Molded fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3261.

B. Fittings shall be manufactured by injection molding or by extrusion and machining,

or fabricated from polyethylene pipe conforming to specified pipe dimensions. The pressure rating of the fittings shall be equivalent to the pipe DR rating specified on the drawings, unless otherwise specified.

C. Fittings shall be suitable for joining by butt fusion or electrofusion unless otherwise

specified on the Drawings, or as approved by the engineer. Fittings specified as flanged shall include flange adapters and back-up rings. Do not use stub ends to substitute flange adapters.

D. Back-up rings shall be epoxy coated ductile iron, ANSI Class 150 Standard unless

noted otherwise. Back-up rings specified on the Drawings or in the material list as Stainless Steel or 316SS shall be ASTM A351 CF8M (316 Stainless Steel), with dimensions to match ANSI B16.5 Class 150 Standard dimensions, unless noted otherwise. Minimum pressure rating as noted on the Drawings or as required to match pressure rating of the pipe on which it is being used.

E. Bolts used for joining flanged connections shall be Stainless Steel and in accordance

with ASTM A320, Grade B8M, or ASTM A193, Grade B8M. Nuts shall be Stainless Steel and in accordance with ASTM A194. Alternately, Commercial Grade18-8 Stainless Steel bolts and nuts may be used, but a certificate of compliance must be submitted to the Engineer. Stainless steel washers shall be used with each nut.


F. Gaskets shall be used at all flanged connections and shall be full-face, black nitrile

rubber gaskets (Garlock style 9122 or equal), 1/8-inch-thick, fifty-five to seventy-five (55-75) Durometer Shore D Hardness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1 CERTIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer shall test all materials as required by these Specifications and the standards referenced.

B. Engineer shall have free access to all testing and records pertaining to material to be

delivered to the job site. C. The Engineer may be present at any or all material testing operations. D. Joint tests are intended for qualification of joint design and shall be considered to be

a qualification test to establish the adequacy of the manufacturer's joint design. The manufacturer shall certify that tests have been performed within the last year with pipes equivalent in size and design and that they have passed the test enumerated in the specifications.

3-2 GENERAL

A. Verify all lines, grades, and measurements before installing pipes and confirm the location of pipe, fittings, and connections. Before laying each section of pipe or fitting, check the grade and correct any irregularities found. The trench bottom shall form a uniform bearing and support for the pipe.

B. Inspect pipe and fittings prior to assembly. Mark and remove from jobsite materials

that are damaged or do not meet these Specifications. Cut out and remove sections of pipe with cuts or gouges with a depth that is in excess of ten percent of the wall thickness.

C. Remove debris of any kind from inside the pipe and keep it clean during and after

laying. When pipe laying is not in progress, including during the noon hours, close the open ends of the pipe. Do not permit trench water, animals, or foreign objects to enter the pipe.

D. Prepare the foundation for the pipe installation and install bedding and backfill in

accordance with Section 02330: Earthwork. Do not install pipe until excavation and materials under the pipe are properly dewatered in accordance with Section 02240: Dewatering.

E. Handle and install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Handle

pipe in a manner to avoid any damage to the pipe and fittings.


F. At the location of each joint, dig joint holes in the bottom of the trench and at the sides to permit completion and visual inspection of the entire joint. Holes are not necessary for butt-fused joints that have been inspected prior to placement of pipe in the trench or final location.

G. Install the pipe to maintain a minimum separation between the new pipe and other

pipes of twelve inches (12”), or as otherwise specified on the Drawings.

3-3 POLYETHYLENE PIPE

A. All polyethylene pipe shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendation, and in accordance with ASTM D2774 and PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe - Underground Installation of Polyethylene Pipe.

B. Fusion:

(1) Butt fusion: The procedures for butt fusion of PE4710 polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer recommendations, and in general conformance with ASTM D2657 and PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe - Chapter 6 - Polyethylene Joining Procedures. Produce joint-weld strengths equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the pipe. (2) Electrofusion: Electrofusion joining shall be done in accordance with the manufacturers recommended procedure. Other sources of electrofusion joining information are ASTM F 1290 and PPI TN 34. The process of electrofusion requires an electric source , a transformer, commonly called an electrofusion box that has wire leads, a method to read electronically (by laser)or otherwise input the barcode of the fitting, and a fitting that is compatible with the type of electrofusion box used. The electrofusion box must be capable of reading and storing the input parameters and the fusion results for later download to a record file. Qualification of the fusion technician shall be demonstrated by evidence of electrofusion training within the past year on the equipment to be utilized for this project.

C. The pipe shall be handled, inspected, and stored by the Contractor according to the

recommendations in the PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe - Inspections, Test, and Safety Considerations.

D. The pipe may be cold bent to meet the lines and grades specified on the Drawings.

The cold bend radius shall not be less than the minimum as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

E. All HDPE pipe and fitting flange connections shall be gasketed.

3-4 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Visual Joint Inspection: The Contractor shall provide adequate notice and opportunity to the Engineer for a visual inspection of all pipe joints, and all other pipe connections. If necessary for complete inspection, the Contractor shall provide


equipment and/or manpower that may be required by the Engineer to perform the inspection. Any and all joints that are deemed unsatisfactory by the Engineer shall be removed and replaced.

B. Surface Damage: The Contractor shall provide adequate notice and opportunity to

the Engineer for a visual inspection of all pipe and fitting surfaces. If necessary for complete inspection, the Contractor shall provide equipment and/or manpower that may be required by the Engineer to perform the inspection. At the Engineer’s discretion, excessive damage may require the removal and replacement of the damaged sections.

C. Bent Strap Test: The Contractor shall perform a Bent Strap Test on a strip sample

from the first fusion joint of each day that pipe fusion is to be performed, or as otherwise requested by the Engineer. The Bent Strap Test shall be performed as described in PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe - Inspections, Test, and Safety Considerations, or as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The test sample must pass this test before fusion operations can commence that day. The Contractor must demonstrate the functionality of the test procedure using a sample of pipe of the same thickness as specified for the Project.

D. Heat-Fusion Data Logger: The Contractor shall furnish and operate an electronic

data logger to monitor temperature, pressure, and timing for each fusion joint. Each fusion joint shall be marked to correspond to the collected fusion data. Printouts of the fusion data shall be provided to the Engineer daily, or upon request. Any joint made for which the fusion parameters do not fall within the acceptable range must be removed and remade.

E. Hydrostatic Leak Test: The Contractor shall perform hydrostatic leak testing on the

entire system or in segments. The Contractor shall provide equipment, materials, and personnel required for testing. The internal test pressure shall be 50 psi at the highest point of the main outlet pipe. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Plan or Procedure to be followed to perform the hydrostatic leak testing, and submit this Plan or Procedure to the Engineer for approval. The plan should follow the procedures recommended by the pipe manufacturer and in conformance with the procedure described in PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe - Inspections, Test, and Safety Considerations. The preferred testing medium is clean water. The Engineer must be present during the test for the results to be accepted.

The following pipelines require testing:

• Main Outlet Conduit F. The Contractor must repair or replace any and all failed sections of the piping at the

Contractor’s expense.

- End of Section 02510 -

Zancanella & Associates, Inc. Bypass Pumping – 02530 Page 1

DIVISION 5

SECTION 02530

BYPASS PUMPING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This specification defines the requirements for continuous bypass pumping related to construction on the WWTP lift station.

2 GENERAL

A. The contractor shall be required to maintain flow to the Town of Gypsum

WWTP at all times regardless of construction in progress. Contractor shall submit a written plan detailing the proposed methods of providing uninterrupted flow to the WWTP.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

A. The plan submitted by the contractor shall include a comprehensive written procedure that describes the intended construction sequence for maintaining the flow of wastewater to the WWTP.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

A. The contractor may include the existing pumps in his plan and shall detail the phasing of construction to show the utilization of the existing and propoposed pumps as appropriate. B. Regardless of the use of the existing and proposed pumps, contractor will also be required to have in place a redundant bypass pumping system capable of handling the expected peak flows of the collection system, in the event that the existing or proposed pumps become inoperable. Contractor shall have said by-pass pumping equipment in place prior to the start of excavation work on the site. Two pumps shall be available if existing town pumps cannot be used. Both the primary and the backup by-pass pumping systems shall be of adequate capacities and sizes to handle the flow and shall maintain a continuous service during the entire construction process until the new pumps and pipelines have been placed in service, including the pipelines being backfilled to the proposed surface grade. The by-pass pumping systems shall be approved and accepted by the engineer and the city prior to installation. C. the contractor’s redundant systems shall be capable of drawing from the existing wetwell for the lift station and discharging to the specified discharge manhole. Repair couplings, pipe and associated parts for repair of the bypass system shall be available on site to allow immediate repair.

Zancanella & Associates, Inc. Bypass Pumping – 02530 Page 2

D. the plan submitted by the contractor shall include a comprehensive written procedure that describes the intended construction sequence for maintaining the flow of wastewater to the wwtp. Items to address shall include the following as a minimum:

1. location and method of by-pass pumping. 2. Temporary bypass pump startup and draw-down procedures 3. repair/reconnection of the existing equipment as necessary. 4. dismantling and removal of temporary equipment after release by the engineer and the town. 5. this procedure shall be submitted prior to commencement of construction.

E. Operation of the existing town pump station will be by town personnel only.

- End of Section 02530 -

MISCELLANEOUS METALS – SECTION 05050

05050-1

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: The work to be performed in accordance with this Specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories and of performing all operations required in connection with the fabrication and installation of all miscellaneous metalwork shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

D. American Welding Standards (AWS)

1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS: Prior to fabrication or delivery and obtain Engineer’s approvals. Show materials and specifications list, construction and fabrication details, layout and erection diagrams, and method of anchorage to adjacent construction. Give location, type, size and extent of welding and bolted connections and clearly distinguish between shop and field connections. Prior to submittal, coordinate shop drawings with related trades to insure proper mating of assemblies. Catalog work sheets showing illustrated cuts of item to be furnished, scale, details, and dimensions may be submitted for standard manufactured items.

Where items must fit and coordinate with finished surfaces or constructed spaces, take measurements at site and not from drawings. Where concrete, masonry or other materials must be set to exact locations to receive work, furnish assistance and direction necessary to permit other trades to properly locate their work. Where welded connectors, concrete, or masonry inserts are required to receive work, shop drawings shall show exact locations required, and all such drawings shall be furnished to the trades responsible for installing the connectors or inserts.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Unless otherwise specified all work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following specifications and codes:

A. Steel: Fabrication and erection of structural steel and miscellaneous steel shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the AISC “Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel for Buildings”, and “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. Rolled shapes, plates, and bars shall conform to the latest edition of the AISC “Manual of Steel Construction” and shall also conform to current ASTM Designation A-36.

B. Aluminum: Fabrication of aluminum shall be in accordance with ASCE “Specification for Structures of Aluminum Allow 6061-T6, Second Progress Report of the Committee of the Structural Division on Design in Lightweight Structural Alloys”.

C. Weld Quality: All field and shop welding shall be performed by welders qualified and certified in accordance with AWS D1.0 “Welding in Building Construction”. Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.


05050-2

1.5 GENERAL METALS:

A. Structural Steel. Structural steel and miscellaneous metalwork not otherwise specified shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation A36. Items covered by this requirement include the lintel beam, angles, and channels, the trolley hoist beam, support angles, scum baffle supports, metal stairs and walkways, weirs, troughs, etc.

B. Bolts and Connectors. All steel bolts and washers shall conform to ASTM Standard A-307,

Grade A. Where called for on Drawings, Specifications, or where submerged, normally or occasionally, bolts shall be fabricated from stainless steel, Type 316, (B8M, B8MA) in accordance with ASTM Standard A-193. When fastening to galvanized steel, hot dip galvanized bolts shall be used. Hoisting eyes shall be galvanized.

C. Expansion Bolts. Expansion bolts and anchors shall be stainless steel and used only

where specifically noted or detailed. Expansion bolts shall not be acceptable for anchorage of any vibrating machinery or equipment. Anchors for equipment and pipe supports are specified elsewhere in the Specifications. Where expansion bolts are used in Interior Dry Locations provide snap-off or flush shell concrete anchors produced by Phillips Self-Drilling Concrete Anchors, Star Selfdril Shields, or equal. For exterior or wet locations, they shall be similar and equal to Molly Parabolt or Phillips Redhead. Where expansion bolts are used to fasten to concrete block, they shall be similar and equal to Rawl anchors.

D. Fabrication. All miscellaneous metalwork shall be manufactured using the best practices

of modern sheet metal, structural steel and foundry shops. Welding shall be performed by qualified welders with all exposed welds being ground smooth.

Steel structural built-up members shall have full-length continuous welded joints to seal inaccessible surfaces.

E. Painting. The prime coat of paint required by the Painting Specification shall be shop applied on all metalwork to be painted.

PART 2.0 -- PRODUCTS:

2.1 HOT DIP GALVANIZING: When items are specified to be hot dip galvanized, hot dip galvanize after all fabrication and welding is completed. Hot dip galvanize sheet steel, plain or shaped, in accordance with ASTM A653. Hot dip galvanize items fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and straps 1/8-inch thick and greater in accordance with ASTM A123. Hot dip steel hardware in accordance with ASTM A153 or F2329. Size threads to allow for galvanized coating, and re-run after galvanizing if required for a smooth fit.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL PRODUCTS:

A. Pipe Supports: As specified in Specification 15200.

B. Ships Ladder: Furnish and install prefabricated ships ladder at the location shown on the

Drawings. Ladders inside the building shall be steel, with welded or bolted connections as required to facilitate fabrication and installation. Hot dip galvanize all


05050-3

components after welding and fabrication. Assembly hardware shall be hot dip galvanized steel. Anchors to concrete shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Ladder rungs shall be rough punch perforated or other approved means to provide a durable non-slip surface. Handrail shall be as specified herein and fabricated from hot dip galvanized steel.

As an alternative to hot-dip galvanized steel, Contractor may submit a ships ladder and associated handrail of aluminum construction.

2.3 ALUMINUM HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL:

A. Provide handrail in the locations shown on the Drawings. Structural criteria, design,

anchorage, fabrication, and installation shall comply with the applicable building codes, OSHA, and ANSI/NAAMM Standard AMP 521-01 Pipe Railing Systems Manual.

B. Fabricate from 1-1/2 inch, Schedule 40, 6063-T6 alloy aluminum pipe with clear satin

anodized finished. Rails shall have a smooth surface with no sharp corners. Welded and bolted fittings and attachments shall be fabricated true to size, configuration, and detail shown in the specified references. Grind and polish welds flush and smooth. Curves shall bend on a radius of not less than 6 inches. Blind rivets, self tapping screws, and fasteners shall be stainless steel. All mounting brackets and hardware shall be supplied by the rail manufacturer. Handrail to be Aluma-Rail by Enerco, Connectorail by Julius Blume & Co, or equal.

C. Maximum post spacing 6 feet.

D. Handrails: Bend or offset handrails where required to provide 1-½-inch minimum code

required clearance between handrail and edge of floor slab, columns, ducts, pipes, pilasters or other obstructions.

E. Chain Closure: Provide chain closures to span openings at ladders and ships ladders for

fall protection. Chain to be made from structural aluminum, with oblong links. Provide three chains 4 inches longer than the anchorage spacing for each guarded area. Mount chains as shown. Provide each chain with boat type snap hooks at each end. Provide eye bolts with 3/8-inch-shank diameter and with 7/8-inch eye for attachment of chains at each anchorage. Provide fittings of the same material and finish as the chain.

2.4 ACCESS HATCHES: Hatches shall be aluminum and installed where shown on the drawings. Dimensions are shown on the Drawings, and are unobstructed clear opening. Comply with the following requirements for all hatches. Bilco “J-AL” series or equal.

A. Live load: 300 pounds per square foot.

B. Doors: Single leaf doors oriented to open in the direction shown on the Drawings.

¼-inch minimum thickness mill finish aluminum, diamond pattern, reinforced as required to withstand the specified loads. Doors shall open to 90 degrees and shall include an automatic hold-open arm with a positive automatic latch that will secure the door in the open position until the release handle is activated. Provide stainless steel hold-open pin through holes in hold-open arms to insure against accidental hatch closure. Attach pin to


05050-4

hatch with a short stainless steel chain to prevent loss. Submit details of latch for review. Door hinges shall be recessed or flush.

C. Frame: 1/4-inch minimum thickness aluminum channel with anchor flange all around for

embedment in structural concrete. Channel shall be coated with asphaltic isolation coating where in contact with concrete, grout, or masonry. Frame channel shall be equipped with a drainage coupling to remove rainwater. Plumb a PVC drain line with a p-trap to a free discharge into the wet well below.

D. Lock: Provide a slam lock with removable handle. Provide a hinged covered recess with

door to frame padlock hasp.

E. Lift assist: Provide stainless steel compression spring(s) or pneumatic spring(s) enclosed in sealed telescoping tube(s).

F. All non-aluminum metals and hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.

G. Float hangers: Provide hooks for suspension of pump control floats integral with the hatch frame.

H. Safety Grate: Provide a secondary fall protection safety grate located beneath the solid

hatch cover, which lifts independently from the cover and is equipped with a latch to hold it in the open position. The grate shall be manufactured from aluminum flat bars, load- rated for 300 pounds per square foot, and safety orange or yellow in color. The grate shall have a padlock hasp for locking in the closed position. The grate shall comply with OSHA Standard 1910.23 for fall protection.

PART 3 – FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.1 GENERAL: All fabrication shall be equal to the best practice in modern sheet metal and structural shops. Welding shall be performed by qualified welders, and welds exposed to view shall be ground smooth. Bolt hole templates shall be furnished or obtained where required, to or from other subcontractors and equipment suppliers to insure accurate locations for connections.

3.2 HANDLING: Care shall be exercised in the handling and shipping of all miscellaneous metalwork to prevent bending and distortion, scratching, and exposure to the elements.

Provide temporary shoring and bracing with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. Design and placement of temporary shoring and bracing shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor.

3.3 ASSEMBLY: Set structural members to the lines and elevations shown on the Drawings with all parts aligned and properly adjusted before permanently fastening. Unaligned bolt holes shall be re-drilled or reamed to permit bolting. Gas cutting torches shall not be used for correcting fabrication errors or discrepancies. Field welding is not permitted except where specifically allowed or called out on the Drawings.


05050-5

Where connections are required between weirs, troughs, and walls, the bolted connections shall be sealed with neoprene sheet. Weirs shall be set exactly level. No leakage shall be permitted around plates, weirs, connections or through bolt holes.

3.4 ACCESS HATCHES: Deliver hatches to job site in time for installation with the concrete pour. Ensure all surfaces to be in contact with concrete are coated with asphaltic isolation coating; touch up or recoat as necessary. Bare aluminum shall not be in contact with concrete. Prior to the concrete pour, install the PVC drain line, with p-trap, within the concrete formwork from the frame drain coupling to a free discharge opening flush with the ceiling of the wet well structure. Install in conformance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Set frame level and true to plane at all four corners, and flush with adjacent finished surfaces. Doors, when closed, shall be flush with frames and flush with each other.

3.5 HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL: Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Sleeves shall be manufactured from larger diameter pipe of the same material as the posts. All flanges shall be fastened to concrete with expansion anchors. Mounting sleeves for side wall locations shall be welded to a flat plat extending a minimum of 3 inches into the sleeve. All sleeves shall be 6 inches in length. When in place, all railing shall be straight and level without kinks. Rail height shall be 42 inches above the floor level. Provide 4-inch toeboard along the perimeter of all elevated floors, installed with 1/2-inch gap above the floor. After alignment is accepted, posts shall be caulked in place. All aluminum in contact with or embedded in concrete, masonry, or grout shall be coated with asphalt bituminous coating on the mating face to prevent direct contact.

- END OF SECTION

SEALANTS AND CAULKING – SECTION 07050

07050-1

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: Provide all sealant and caulking work, complete as indicated, specified, and required. This Specification is intended to be general in scope and not specific as to locations of caulking and sealants. Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Details thoroughly and familiarize himself with the extent of the caulking and sealing involved. Only a complete and absolutely watertight and weathertight job will be accepted. Additional information pertaining to sealing and/or caulking will be found in the various specific Specifications and shall be coordinated with the work of the Specification.

Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, sealants/caulking shall be applied at all following locations:

A. Intersections of dissimilar materials for structures (e.g. masonry next to metal or wood; metal to glass)

B. Joints between existing masonry walls and new walls.

1.2 REFERENCES:



1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. Submit technical data by all manufacturers of proposed materials sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the specification requirements. Submit full range standard color chart of each material for color selection by the Engineer. Submit material manufacturer’s printed preparation and application instructions to Engineer.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Deliver sealant and caulking compounds in unopened factory labeled containers. Labels shall bear statement of conformance to standards specified for each material and shall bear manufacturer’s name and product designation.

PART 2.0 -- PRODUCTS:

2.1 SEALANT FOR HORIZONTAL SURFACES, EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR: Sealant shall be a two-part self leveling and pourable urethane equal to Vulkem 45 as manufactured by MAMECO International (The Master Mechanical Company), or approved materials produced by Product Research and Chemical Corporation, or Sika Chemical Company, or equal. Color shall be chosen by the Engineer.

2.2 SEALANT FOR VERTICAL SURFACES, EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR: Sealant shall be a two-part non-sag (gun grade) manufactured by MAMECO Internation Vulkem 227, Sika Chemical Company, or equal. Color shall be aesthetically compatible with the adjacent surfaces and shall be chosen by the Engineer.

2.3 PRIMER: Where required primer shall be used as recommended in writing by the sealant manufacturer. Primer shall have been tested for non-staining characteristics and durability on samples of actual surfaces to be sealed.


07050-2

2.4 BACK-UP MATERIALS AND PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS: Use non-staining material, compatible with sealant and primer, and of a resilient nature, such as closed cell polyethylene rod, or elastomeric tubing or rod (neoprene, butyl, or EPDM). Materials impregnated with oil, bitumen, or similar materials shall not be used. Size and shape shall be as indicated by joint details in drawings and shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing. Sealant shall not adhere to back-up material.

2.5 BOND BREAKERS: Where required, shall be polyethylene tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing.

PART 3 -- INSTALLATION

3.1 GENERAL: Install sealants and caulking by material manufacturer’s approved applicator in strict conformance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Sealant installer shall examine all surfaces and report to the Contractor all conditions not acceptable. Thoroughly clean all joints, removing al foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt, frost, and old caulking materials. Sealant must be applied to the base surface. Previously applied paint or primer must be entirely removed.

Porous materials such as concrete, masonry or stone should be cleaned where necessary by grinding, blast-cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or combination of these methods to provide a clean, sound base surface for sealant adhesion. Concrete shall be cured sufficiently prior to application. Laitance shall be removed by acid washing, grinding, or mechanical abrading. Form oils shall be removed by blast-cleaning. Loose particles present or resulting from grinding, abrading or blast-cleaning shall be removed by blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air (or vacuuming) prior to application of primer and sealant.

Non-porous surfaces, such as metal and glass, shall be cleaned either mechanically or chemically. Protective coating such as methacrylate lacquer on metallic surfaces shall be removed by a solvent that leaves no residue. Solvent shall be used with clean cloths or lintless paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. Wipe dry with clean, dry cloths or lintless paper towels. Joint areas to be protected with masking tape or strippable films shall be cleaned before application of tape or film. All joints to receive sealant shall be as indicated on the Drawings or shop drawings. Do not seal joints until they are in compliance with Drawings or meet with the approval of the Engineer.

Joints to receive sealant shall be a minimum of ¼-inch wide by ¼-inch deep, unless otherwise approved. For joints in concrete, masonry, or stone, the depth of the sealant may be equal to the width of joints up to ½-inch wide. For joints ½-inch to 1-inch wide the depth shall be ½-inch. For expansion and other joints, 1 to 2 inches wide the depth shall be not greater than ½ the applied sealant width. For joints exceeding 2 inches in width: depth shall be as directed by sealant manufacturer.

For joints in metal, glass, and other non-porous surfaces the sealant depth shall be a minimum of ½ the applied sealant width, and shall in no case exceed the applied sealant width. Joints to receive sealant, back-up material or preformed joint filler shall be cleaned out, raked to full width and depth as required by sealant installer. Joints shall be of sufficient width and depth to accommodate specified back-up material or preformed joint filler and sealant.


07050-3

3.2 APPLICATION: Install back-up material or joint filler, of type and size specified or required by the sealant manufacturer, at proper depth to provide sealant dimensions as detailed. Back-up material shall be of suitable size and shape and compressed 25-50 percent to fit joints as required. Sealant shall not be applied without back-up material and/or bond breaker strip. When using back-up tube avoid lengthwise stretching. Tube or rod shall not be twisted or braided.

Apply masking tape, where required, in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Prime surfaces, where required, with primer as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Follow sealant manufacturer’s instruction regarding mixing (if required), surface preparation, priming, and application procedure. For sealant application when air temperature is below 40°F consult sealant manufacturer for recommendations before applying sealant.

Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate means. Gun shall have nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as designed. All joint surfaces shall be tooled to provide the contour as indicated on the Drawings. When tooling joints, use tooling solution recommended by manufacturer. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled. Cure in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 CLEAN UP: Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant as work progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean condition. The sealant joints shall be uniformly smooth, free of wrinkles, flush with adjacent surfaces and absolutely water tight. Adjacent surfaces which have been soiled by the application of the sealing compound shall be wiped clean and be left neat. The work will be adjudged defective due to the sealant’s hardening, cracking, crumbling, melting, wrinkling, shrinking, splitting, leaking, or running.

- END OF SECTION -

DOORS – SECTION 08100

08100-1

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: The work of this section includes providing and installing all roll up doors and hollow metal doors and frames. Provide all items that are necessary to comply with applicable fire and building codes regardless of whether scheduled or not.

1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330:

A. Product information of sufficient detail and quantity to demonstrate compliance with the requirements specified herein.

B. Schedule of all finished hardware required. The schedule shall follow the requirements of the Specifications and shall indicate type, manufacturer’s name and number, location and finish or each item required. Approval of the schedule will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware.

C. Certificates of compliance.

D. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING: Items shall be stored in the original container out of inclement weather for protection against the elements.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS ROLL UP DOORS

2.1 MANUFACTURER: Similar to and equal to the roll up doors installed in the main Waste Water Treatment Facility Building. Submit for approval.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS 2.2 MANUFACTURER: Similar to and equal to Ceco Door Products Imperial Maxim vandal- resistant door and frame system, flush panel design, without glass light. Similar to and equal to Ceco Door Products Imperial Maxim vandal- resistant door and frame system, flush panel design, without glass light.

2.3 MATERIALS:

A. Conform to Steel Door Institute guide specifications, and ANSI A250.8.

B. Extra heavy duty 14 gauge galvanized steel, for doors and frames. Exterior grade. Seamless fabrication. Foamed-in-place polyurethane core for thermal and impact resistance.

C. Dimensions: Provide door of nominal 3’-0” x 6’-8” dimensions, or as approved by Engineer.

2.4 SECURITY HANDLES/LOCKSETS:

A. Locksets and exterior handles shall be heavy duty, exterior rated, vandal resistant. Locksets shall comply with and be keyed per the Owner’s requirements. Submit options to the Owner for review and selection.


08100-2

B. Provide heavy duty door strike security plate to prevent exterior access to or tampering of the bolt.

2.5 HINGES: ANSI A156.7, heavy weight, 7 gauge. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. Full mortise. Antifriction bearing hinges, stainless steel with stainless steel pin, maximum security design.


08100-3

2.6 SURFACE CLOSERS:

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

1. Surface Closer with Cover: Grade 1; Modern Type with mechanism enclosed in cover.

2. Mounting: Parallel arm.

3. Type: Hold open with spring-cushioned stop arm.

4. Backcheck: Adjustable, effective between 60 and 85 degrees of door opening.

5. Cover Material: Molded plastic.

6. Closing Power Adjustment: At least 50 percent more than minimum tested value.

2.7 DOOR GASKETING:

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

B. Adjustable, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Silicone bulb gasket material held in place by aluminum housing; fastened to frame stop with screws.

C. Door Sweeps: Vinyl gasket material held in place by flat aluminum housing or flange; surface mounted to face of door with screws with integral rain drip.

2.8 THRESHOLDS:

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.

B. Saddle Thresholds:

1. Type: Applied gasketed stop and fluted top, barrier free.

2. Base Metal: Aluminum.

2.9 KICK PLATES: Satin finish stainless steel, 0.050 gauge with beveled edges, 12 inches high x 1-1/2-inch narrower than the single door. Provide on interior and exterior faces.

2.10 EXIT DEVICES: Touch bar type: Heavy-duty type UL listed for accident hazard and capable of meeting UL "A" label rating, rim latch or mortise design with 3/4-inch anti-friction latch bolt. Latch bolt shall retract when horizontal pressure is exerted on touch bar. Latch bolts


08100-4

on vertical rod devices shall remain retracted until door closes. Plate all exposed surfaces to match hardware finishes. Provide stainless steel touch bars, satin finish.

2.11 FABRICATION:

A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer’s plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.

B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate

doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction.

C. Core Construction: One of the following manufacturer’s standard core materials that

produce a door complying with SDI standards:

1. Polystyrene, polyurethane or polyisocyanurate.

D. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, “Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.”

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from

either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.

G. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or

scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.

K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed

hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

L. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and

seamless face joints.

2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.

M. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.

N. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI

A250.8.


08100-5

2.12 FINISHES:

A. Prime coat from factory with oven-cured primer paint in accordance with manufacturer’s standard compatible with galvanized steel substrate. Comply with ANSI A250.10.

B. Field Finish: Apply a finish coat in the field compatible with factory prime coat in

accordance with Specification 09900. Color shall match adjacent masonry wall color.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer’s instructions, and as

specified.

B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

1. Place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.

2. Fill frames with spray insulation foam as recommended by insulation

manufacturer.

C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or

damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.

C. Field Coating: Coat factory prime coat in accordance with Specification 09900 in the field. Do not coat stainless steel and other hardware and appurtenant items not to be coated.

- END OF SECTION -

PAINTING – SECTION 09900

09900-1

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION: The work to be performed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories required and of performing all operations needed in connection with the painting of the various parts of the work.

No paint shall be applied to permanently finished equipment which is considered to be acceptable by the Engineer such as factory-finished motor control centers, control consoles, and factory finished equipment. Equipment and their appurtenant parts such as guards and bases which arrive on the job site only primed, shall be painted in accordance with the appropriate painting system described following. All shop prime coats by equipment manufacturers shall be applied to surfaces as specified herein with paint that is approved and compatible with accepted top coat paint.

A “Summary of the Items to be Painted or Stained” under this contract is given following these General Requirements.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

• National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE);

• Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

The manufacturer shall have 10 years of successful experience and shall be able to demonstrate successful performance on comparable projects.

The applicator shall be able to demonstrate a minimum of 5 years application experience on projects of similar size and complexity to this project. All applying personnel must be trained and experienced in the application of each product.

1.3 MANUFACTURERS’S RECOMMENDATIONS: All paint shall be mixed and applied with strict conformance to the paint manufacturer's directions, which will take precedence over this Specification. Selection of paints to be applied to each specific substrate material shall be verified with the paint manufacturer and his approval obtained.

1.4 MATERIALS SUBMITTAL: The paints to be used on the various substrate materials shall be of the best quality commercial and industrial grades and shall be manufactured by nationally known and approved paint manufacturers with local representation. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, in time to allow the Engineer reasonable review time, a minimum of three copies of a Painting Schedule. This Schedule shall give the information listed below for all the paints and stains he intends to use on all the items requiring paint. This shall be done for substituted paints as well as those listed in the Painting Systems.

A. name of the manufacturer of the paint; B. generic name of paint (chemical composition type such as alkyd, epoxy, vinyl, etc.); C. trade name and number of each specific paint; D. number of coats to be applied for each paint; E. dry film thickness to be achieved for each coat; F. spreading rate at which each coat will be applied; G. color name and number accompanied by color chart;


09900-2

H. results of accepted tests (ASTM, Fed. Std.) for hardness, abrasion, impact, humidity, etc.

I. Termination and transition details for wet well protective coatings.

Paints shall be supplied to the jobsite in unbroken containers on which will be labeled the designated name, formula, or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer, all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use.

With the approval of the Engineer, the field applied primer coat may be omitted when the equipment or material installed has a satisfactory primer coat that is compatible with top coats. Some paint systems require no primer coat, only one or more coats of the paint used as the topcoat. In these cases, primers will not be required, but only when omitting the primer is in accordance with the paint manufacturer's directions.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: The materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging and with labels clearly identifying:

• Coating or material name,

• Manufacturer,

• Color name and number

• Batch or lot number,

• Date of manufacture, and

• Mixing and thinning instructions.

Store materials in a clean dry area and within temperature range in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Keep the containers sealed until they are ready for use. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer’s shelf life limits. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.

1.6 COLORS: The exact colors to be used on the various substrate materials will be confirmed by the Engineer from color charts submitted by the Contractor as a portion of the Painting Schedule. General colors to be submitted for use on the various materials are listed with the “Summary of the Items to be Painted and Stained” following these General Requirements.

PART 2 -- MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. Surfaces to receive paint protective coating materials as specified in this Section shall be coated in conformance with the applicable coating systems specified. So far as possible, all paint and coating materials shall be provided by a single source supplier.

B. Products shall be standard for recognized manufacturer engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical or similar applications in the water and wastewater treatment industry.


09900-3

C. Only compatible materials shall be used in the work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. If necessary, subject to approval of the Owner, a compatible barrier coat shall be applied between all existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION: Surface preparation of each substrate material shall be as described in the painting system breakdown and completed prior to beginning the painting operation.

All structural steel, metalwork, piping, and other metal surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of grease, oil, and contaminants by the use of solvents recommended by the manufacturer of the paint which will be applied. When blasting is required in the surface preparation of a painting system, the blasting shall be performed within conformance of the “Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive” as written by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers, 2400 West Loop South, Houston, Texas, hereinafter referred to as NACE. Blasting shall be accomplished in a manner and with the appropriate grit to limit the depth of finished surface profile to a of the dry mil thickness of the paint. Any dust permits required for field blasting shall be obtained by the Contractor.

All dust created by the blasting operation must be removed immediately after the blasting operation by vacuuming. The first coat of paint should be applied to the steel as soon as possible and always the same day that the blasting is done.

3.2 APPLICATION METHODS: Exterior painting shall not be done during damp weather when ambient temperature is below 50°F. Paint manufacturer's directions for cold weather applications shall be followed explicitly. All fresh work shall be protected from damage. For interior work, the temperature shall not be allowed to fall below 50°F while paint is being applied or while it is drying.

All paint shall be evenly applied in a uniform coat. The finished painting shall show no drops, runs, or sagging of materials.

In addition to preparatory sanding, each coat, except the last, shall be fine-sanded. Avoid cross scratches and swirls.


09900-4

Each coat of paint shall be given at least 48 hours to dry before the next coat is applied, unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer's instructions. Any walls that are to have dampproofing applied thereto, will be marked with chalk lines to the approval of the Engineer to establish a clean-cut line at which the dampproofing stops.

All metalwork which has been shop-painted with rust-inhibitive prime coat shall be handled with care to preserve such coating. Before painting, the Contractor shall repaint all defective or damaged areas with an approved prime coat after cleaning and removing dust.

On metal surfaces, each coat of paint shall be applied at the rate specified to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. On concrete and/or masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture. However, in no case shall the stated spreading rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, a protective and decorative finish shall be achieved. Deficiencies in the film thickness shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s) of paint. Where conditions are other than normal because of the weather or because painting must be done in confined spaces, longer drying times will be necessary. Additional coats of paint shall not be applied, nor shall be returned to service until existing paints are thoroughly dry.

Special care shall be taken when painting surfaces in contact with potable water or water in the treatment process so that adequate curing is accomplished. No paint or curing agents shall be used that could impart a taste, odor or discoloration to the water in the process. Manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed.

Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint or for the particular purpose, shall be allowed; all such thinning shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, as well as with the full knowledge and approval of the Engineer. Where two or more coats are specified, the first coat shall be tinted a shade lighter than the following coat, and progressively to the color specified for the final coat, and subject to approval.

Paint both faces and all edges of doors which require painting. Doors between rooms having different finishes shall have edges finished to match the room the door opens into.

Knife-putty nail holes upon the priming coat with putty tinted to color of finished work. Putty full and flush with surrounding surfaces; thumb-puttying will not be permitted. Permit to dry and harden before applying next coat.

3.3 CLEAN-UP/TOUCH-UP WORK: Upon completion, carefully remove all spatterings of paint material from adjoining work, glass, plumbing fixtures, trim and concrete surfaces. A detailed inspection of paint work shall be made and disfigured portions thereof shall be satisfactorily touched up or refinished to produce an acceptable job. All disused implements of service, rubbish and debris, resulting from the work shall be removed from the premises and the entire project left in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition.

3.4 WRITTEN APPROVAL OF COATINGS MANUFACTURER: For all coatings to be applied to new and existing concrete, concrete block, plaster and asbestos cement paneling, written approval shall be obtained from the coatings manufacturer for the items listed below. Three copies of this written approval shall be submitted to the Engineer after the coatings manufacturer has personally inspected each of the following conditions:


09900-5

A. Final surface preparation of all surfaces prior to coating application.

B. Sequencing of application of coatings as to when each surface of each wall and ceiling shall be coated.

This is intended to keep the coatings manufacturer informed of the status of the job at all times so that he can govern the application process to be assured that all coatings are applied within his recommendations.

3.5 SUMMARY OF ITEMS TO BE PAINTED: A summary of the items to be painted and stained under this contract is listed below. A description of acceptable painting systems follows this summary. Where colors are not listed they shall be selected during the submittal procedure.

Item Color Painting System Interior concrete or masonry walls White A1

Interior gypsum board White D1

Exterior Building wood as approved D1

Metallic doors, louvers, and vent hoods Match building B2

Interior PVC piping Match adjacent surface C1

Misc ferrous items not listed elsewhere, shipped Match adjacent surface B2 uncoated or prime coated

Misc ferrous items not listed elsewhere, galvanized Do not paint

Interior Ductile iron piping and accessories as approved

3.6 PAINTING SYSTEMS BREAKDOWN: Paint only those items listed in the above “Summary”. Painting schedule is to be submitted for each of the systems which will be utilized.

A. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces. Paint shall be similar and equal to that manufactured

by the Tnemec Co. unless noted otherwise.

1. Interior Concrete or Block - (Semi-Gloss Polyamide Epoxy)

Surface Preparation. Concrete surfaces must be clean and free of excess dirt, mortar, paint, films, protective coatings, efflorescence, etc. in accordance with SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Substrate surface is to be sound, clean and free of dirt, loose mortar, paint, insulation, insulation glue and mastic films, protective coating, efflorescence, etc. Allow concrete and mortar to cure for a minimum of 14 days before coating. Patch any other defects as directed. If cleaning is necessary, prepare surfaces by etching with solution containing 1 part muriatic


09900-6

acid to 2 to 4 parts fresh water. Rinse with clean water under pressure while scrubbing with stiff brushes or brooms. Test with pH paper and continue rinsing until pH of 7 or higher is obtained.

Dry Mil. Paint Name and No. Thickness Spreading Rate Block Filler: Series 130 Envirofill N/A 80-100 sq.ft./gal. Coat № 1 Series N69-Color H.B. Epoxoline 4.0 mils 277 sq.ft./gal. Coat № 2 Series N69-Color H.B. Epoxoline 4.0 mils 277 sq.ft./gal.

B. Miscellaneous Metal Surfaces. Paint shall be similar and equal to that manufactured by Tnemec Co.

1. Interior/Exterior Railings, Metal Windows, Doors and Frames, Miscellaneous

Metalwork (Not submerged, but exposed to moist atmosphere and/or sunlight and weather). (Aliphatic Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel over Polyamide Epoxy)

Surface Preparation. Remove all grease, oils and contaminants. Remove all weld splatters and grind rough and sharp welds to smooth, rounded contour and blast clean to near-white blast finish (NACE № 2). Surface to be dry.

Paint Name and No. Dry Mil. Thickness

Spreading Rate

Coat № 1 High-Build Epoxoline N69 5.0 ± 1.0 175 sq. ft./gal. Coat № 2 Endura Shield 73 2.5 min. + 1.0 372 sq. ft./gal.

C. PVC Pipe and Fittings. Paint shall be similar and equal to that manufactured by the Tnemec Co.

1. Exterior Exposed

Surface Preparation: Ensure surfaces are clean, dry and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. Scarify the surfaces.

Dry Mil. Paint Name and No. Thickness Spreading Rate Coat № 1 Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline 3.0 mils N/A Coat № 2 Series 73 Endura-Shield 3.0 mils N/A

D. Wood, drywall, masonite: Paint shall be similar and equal to that manufactured by Tnemec Co. or as specified herein.

1. Interior/Exterior

Surface Preparation. Remove all grease, oil and contaminants. Putty all nail holes. Sand smooth. Surface to be clean and dry.

Dry Mil.


09900-7

Paint Name and No. For Drywall:

Thickness Spreading Rate

Coat № 1 151-Elasto-Grip 1.0 mils. 400 sq.ft./gal.

For Wood: Coat № 1 10-99 White

3.0 mils.

300 sq.ft./gal.

For Both: Coat № 2 Series 114 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 5.0 mils. 135 sq.ft./gal.

2. Ferrous Surfaces (Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings)

Surface Preparation

Workmanship for metal surface preparation shall be in conformance with the current SSPC Standards and this Section. Blast-cleaned surfaces shall match the standard samples available from the National Association of Corrosion Engineers, NACE Standard TM-01-70 - Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive and TM-01-75 - Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Centrifugally Blast Cleaned with Steel Grit.

Oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants shall be removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1 - Solvent Cleaning prior to blast cleaning.

Sharp edges shall be rounded or chamfered, and burrs and surface defects and weld splatter shall be ground smooth prior to blast cleaning.

Shop-applied coatings shall not be incorporated in the coating system. Shop- applied coatings shall be completely removed during the surface preparation process.

General ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile of 3.0 to 3.5 mils. Blast Cleaning shall produce a minimum surface profile of 3.0 mils.

Cast or ductile-iron piping surfaces including fittings shall be prepared in accordance with NAPF 500-03, NAPF 500-03-04, and NAPF 50. Cast or ductile iron surfaces shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a clean, gray uniform metal appearance free of variations in color and loose materials.

Remove traces of grit, dust, dirt, rust scale, friable material, loose corrosion products or embedded abrasive from substrate by vacuum cleaning prior to coating application.

Care must be taken to prevent contamination of the surface after blasting from worker’s fingerprints, deleterious substances on workers’ clothing, or from atmospheric conditions.


09900-8

Paint Name. Same as specified for System B1.

Thickness For Ferrous Items: 30 to 40 mils DFT, applied in one or more coats as recommended by the manufacturer.

Field Inspection and Testing Same as specified for System D1, and:

Film Thickness Testing: On ferrous metals, the dry film coating thickness shall be measured in accordance with the SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 2 using a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge such as Mikrotest Model FM, Elcometer Model 111/1EZ, or equal. Each coat shall be tested for the correct thickness. No measurements shall be made until at least 8 hours after application of the coating.

Holiday Repair As specified for System D1, modified as recommended by the manufacturer for ferrous surfaces.

- END OF SECTION -

GENERAL EQUIPMENT – SECTION 11005

11005-1

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: These General Equipment Provisions, which apply to all systems and equipment, are hereby made a part of each and all of the separate Sections of this Specification. Contractor shall direct the attention of all Subcontractors and suppliers of mechanical and related appurtenances for the work to the provisions of the Contract Documents and this Specification.

1.2 MANUFACTURER’S EXPERIENCE: Unless specifically named in the detailed specifications, a manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has demonstrated successful operation and is in regular use. Each manufacturer shall be represented by a local (Colorado) firm.

1.3 STANDARD OF QUALITY: Items of equipment are specified by the name of a manufacturer for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and acceptable experience. Substitute equipment will be acceptable if it can be demonstrated to the Engineer that the substitute is in strict accordance with the Specifications and equal in quality, type, function, efficiency, and standard of design to those models specifically named. Manufacturers specified have been determined by the Engineer to be capable of meeting or exceeding the minimum acceptable standard for the designated equipment style and model. Only one brand, kind, or make of material or equipment shall be used for each specific purpose throughout the work notwithstanding that similar material or equipment of two or more manufacturers may be specified for the same purpose. All materials and equipment incorporated in the work shall be new unless otherwise specified. Material and equipment not covered by detailed requirements in the Contract Documents shall be of the best commercial quality, suitable for the purpose intended, and approved by the Engineer prior to use in the Work. Where materials or equipment are referred to in the singular number, it is intended unless otherwise limited that such references shall be applied to as much material or equipment as is required to complete the Work. The recommendations and instructions of the manufacturers of products used in the Work are hereby made part of these Specifications, except when superseded by other requirements of these Specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS: Contractor shall examine the details and data on each submittal to ensure that it complies with the requirements of the specifications. Submittals received by the Engineer without Contractor review acknowledgement will be rejected and returned immediately for amendment and resubmittal. Any approval by the Engineer of submitted data shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of supplying equipment properly designed and manufactured to produce the quality, efficiency, and capability specified or implied.

A. Storage and Installation Instructions. Submit manufacturer’s storage installation instructions to the Engineer for approval prior to delivery of the equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for following the manufacturer’s installation and storage instructions, as approved by the Engineer, including the rotation of idle pumps and motors and all other items, until acceptance by the Owner. No equipment shall be delivered unless such instructions have been approved by the Engineer.

B. Manufacturer’s product information and data for items listed herein of sufficient quantity to demonstrate compliance with the Specification requirements. Submit together with the associated equipment item specified elsewhere in these Specifications.


11005-2 65418833:3/29/2016

C. Shop Drawings. Unless otherwise specified or directed, submit shop drawings for all mechanical equipment specified. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer in complete sets indexed by Specification paragraph and Drawing number describing the various equipment items or systems. An anchor bolt template shall be shown on the shop drawings and shall be furnished unless waived in writing by the Engineer.

D. Documentation and certification of witnessed or non-witnessed factory test results.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Prepare and submit required manuals covering all mechanical equipment and machinery.

F. Operational Demonstration Testing Procedure Plan, as specified herein.

G. Manufacturer’s Certified Reports. Each major equipment manufacturer, or their authorized representative, shall submit a written report with respect to the furnished equipment certifying that: 1) the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated under their supervision, 2) the equipment is in accurate alignment, 3) they were present when the equipment was placed in operation, 4) the equipment has been operated and inspected under full load conditions and operated satisfactorily, and 5) the equipment is fully covered under the terms of the guarantee.

1.5 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES: The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment for a period of at least two (2) years from the date of final acceptance of the Work. In addition to the general guarantee requirements, equipment guarantee shall cover 1) faulty or inadequate design; 2) improper assembly or fabrication; 3) defective workmanship or materials, and 4) leakage, breakage or other failure. It shall be the manufacturer’s responsibility to ascertain the conditions and service under which the equipment will operate and to warrant that operation under those conditions shall be successful.

For equipment bearing a manufacturer’s standard warranty in excess of two years, or where a special warranty or guarantee period greater than two years is required in a specification section for specific equipment, furnish a copy of the warranty to Owner with Owner named as beneficiary. Any defects or failure within the guarantee period shall immediately be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: All parts of the equipment shall be amply proportioned for all stresses that may occur during fabrication, erection, and intermittent or continuous operation. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the best modern engineering and shop practices. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions and installation location.

2.2 EQUIPMENT ITEMS: Refer to applicable sections in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 15, and 16 of these Specifications for specific equipment and mechanical work items.

2.3 DRIVE UNITS: Provide drive units designed with an AGMA rating and service factor suitable for continuous duty service under operating load, constructed to preclude oil leakage


11005-3 65418833:3/29/2016

around shafts. Thermal rating of each unit shall exceed the design load or proper cooling devices shall be provided. All drives shall be designed especially for the service for which they are to operate.

2.4 ELECTRIC MOTORS: In accordance with Specification 11125.

2.5 LUBRICATION: Provide and install lubricants of types recommended by equipment manufacturers to properly place equipment into operation. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment with the same type of pressure grease-gun fittings, provide a separate, lever operated grease gun for each type of grease required. Lubrication of equipment shall ensure constant presence of lubricant on all wearing surfaces. Lubricant fill and drain openings shall be readily accessible after installation.

2.6 NAMEPLATES AND DATA PLATES: Provide corrosion-resistant nameplates of ample size with embossed lettering, fastened to equipment and drives in a prominent place with corrosion-resisting pins. On nameplates, display manufacturer, serial number, date of manufacture, model number and essential operating characteristics.

2.7 ANCHORS AND SLEEVES: Provide anchor bolts of sufficient length to allow for 1-1/2 inches of grout under baseplates and adequate anchorage into structural concrete. Other specifically detailed lengths either shown or specified will supersede this requirement. Provide sleeves of at least 1.5 times the anchor bolt diameter and of the same material as the anchor bolts.

Anchor all motor-driven equipment with cast-in-place or drilled-in anchors set with epoxy adhesive. Expansion type anchors shall not be used for vibrating or motor-driven equipment.

Unless noted otherwise in the technical specification for specific equipment, provide anchors and associated hardware complying with the following material requirements:

A. Submerged locations and in corrosive areas (at a minimum, spaces with electrical classifications of Class 1 Divisions 1 and 2 shall be considered corrosive): Type 316 Stainless Steel.

B. Moist locations, or buried in earth (at a minimum, any space wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming head space of part of a water channel or basin, shall be considered moist): Type 304 Stainless Steel.

C. Dry locations, or outside exposed to the elements: Hot dip galvanized steel.

D. When applicable, use other materials specifically identified in the specification sections for specific equipment or shown on the Drawings.

2.8 GROUT: Non-shrink, high strength, inorganic, resistant to acids, alkalis, oil and water. Superior bond to steel and cured concrete. Five Star Grout manufactured by U.S. Grout Corporation, or equal.


11005-4 65418833:3/29/2016

2.9 SAFETY GUARDS: Belts, chain drives, projecting set screws, keys, fan blades, couplings, exposed shafts and other moving or rotating parts located so that a person could come in contact therewith shall be enclosed or properly guarded on all sides with safety guards conforming to all Federal, State, and local codes and regulations pertaining; conform to the most restrictive requirements. Use corrosion-resistant materials at least equivalent to hot-dip galvanized steel, 16 USS gage or heavier, or ½-inch mesh galvanized expanded metal. Design guards for easy installation and removal. Provide necessary supports, accessories, and fasteners, of hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel. Design guards in outdoor locations to prevent entrance of rain and dripping water.

Guards or thermal insulation shall also be provided for surfaces within reach of normal personnel access or movement that may have a temperature sufficient to burn human skin.

2.10 SPECIAL TOOLS: For all equipment furnished, provide a complete set of special, non- standard, tools and keys necessary for adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the equipment. Label the tools as to which equipment they are applicable to and their use, and deliver to the Owner.

2.11 SPARE PARTS: When identified in specification sections for specific equipment or mechanical items, provide indicated spare parts to the Owner. Spare parts shall be in the manufacturer’s original packaging and with original labeling. Owner’s written acknowledgement of receipt is required for project completion.

2.12 FINISHES: Unless noted otherwise in the specification section for specific equipment, all equipment furnished, including drives and panels, shall have a complete protective coating system provided at the factory in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard. The coating system shall be suitable for the proposed installation location and exposure. Complete systems shall include a prime coat and finish coat designed to provide protection from corrosion and the elements for the life of the equipment. Damage to the coating system associated with shipping, installation or other mode prior to final acceptance shall be repaired at no additional cost in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

If equipment is specified elsewhere to receive a field coat, comply with the applicable requirements of Specification 09900.

2.13 DISSIMILAR METAL CONTACT: When installation of equipment or mechanical items will result in dissimilar metal contact between mating surfaces or interconnecting piping, provide suitable electrical insulation between surfaces to eliminate direct contact. Piping connections shall utilize dielectric couplings, unions, bushings, or flange insulation kits.

2.14 NOISE AND VIBRATION: Equipment, as installed, shall not create sound levels that are in excess of that permitted to OSHA for 8 hours per day of personnel exposure, unless noted otherwise in the specification for specific equipment. If the sound level cannot be achieved by the bare equipment, provide sound attenuating enclosures designed by the equipment manufacturer to maintain proper ventilation, access, and operation of the equipment.

Equipment that, when operating, has obvious excessive vibration shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer. Baseline vibration measurements shall be made if specified elsewhere for the specific equipment.


11005-5 65418833:3/29/2016

2.15 FACTORY TESTING: Provide factory tests when required in the specification for specific equipment, noting that factory tests may be required in the standards referenced for the equipment. Factory tests shall be conducted at the same conditions and speeds at which the equipment will operate in the project.

If the factory tests are to be witnessed, provide 30 calendar days’ notice so that arrangements can be made for the Engineer or Owner to witness the test. When non-witnessed tests are to be performed, submit certified test results.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT: Proposed substitute equipment which requires alteration of other equipment, structures, piping, or other affected elements, existing or new, will be considered only if the Contractor assumes all responsibility for making and coordinating all necessary alternations. Engineer approval of all revisions to structures, mechanical, electrical, other equipment, or other work made necessary by such substitution shall be obtained and the cost of said revisions, including cost of redesign, shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.

A. Horsepower Ratings specified or shown for the proposed equipment are in accordance with the best information available to the Engineer at the time of design. In the event any equipment item proposed by the Contractor should require motors with larger horsepower rating than indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide the proper control equipment, required modifications to motor control centers, starting equipment, feeder and branch circuits, and all other accessories and appurtenances as required to make the installation comply with the electrical code and to prevent excessive voltage drop without added cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials and equipment to be furnished fit the space available, and shall make the necessary field measurements to ascertain the space requirements including those for connections. Where equipment to be furnished is installed in an existing enclosure or adjacent to existing equipment, the Contractor shall field verify the dimensions of existing equipment, location of conduits, piping, etc., and shall familiarize themselves with all existing conditions and constraints to be encountered in performing such work.

C. All equipment must have a specified capacity, efficiencies, and operating characteristics at the elevation above Sea Level Datum of the project site identified on the Drawings. Minimum service factor shall be 1.15.

3.2 JOB CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION: Drawings are diagrammatic and show the intended arrangement of principal apparatus, piping, and appurtenances. Conform to Drawings as closely as possible and exercise care to secure approved headroom and space conditions (including space needs for movement of personnel, maintenance access, disassembly, and opening of access doors or panels), neat arrangement of piping, valves, hangers, and like items, and to overcome structural and other interferences wherever encountered.

The Contractor shall take all measurements for the Work and associated installations, verify all subcontractor drawings, and be responsible for the proper installation, within the available space of the apparatus specified and shown on the Drawings. Submit written details and reasons for proposed deviations from Drawings and Specifications, and do not deviate


11005-6 65418833:3/29/2016

therefrom unless authorized by the Engineer. If approved changes require alteration of structures or other related work, make such alterations as approved in advance by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Box, crate, or otherwise enclose and protect equipment during shipment, handling, storage, and following installation so as to ensure the preservation of the required quality and fitness of all materials and equipment until final acceptance of the project. Keep equipment dry and covered from exposure to weather. Store pumps, motors, electrical equipment, controls, insulation, and equipment having antifriction or sleeve bearings in weather-tight storage facilities. Lift large equipment items only at the points designated by the manufacturer. Protect factory painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repair damage as directed and approved.

3.4 EXAMINATION: Inspect each item of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct operation before installing. Inspect previously installed related work and verify that it is ready for installation of equipment.

3.5 EQUIPMENT: Manufacturer’s details and instructions shall be followed in the installation. Employ skilled craftsmen experienced in installation of the types of equipment specified. Use specialized tools and equipment, such as precision machinist levels, dial indicators, gages, and micrometers, as applicable to produce installations free of vibration, in proper alignment, and free of defects.

3.6 ANCHORS: Deliver bolts with templates or setting drawings and verify that bolts are correctly located before structural concrete is placed. Use double nut with cut washers to level and plumb equipment.

3.7 BASE AND BEDPLATE GROUTING: Do not place grout until initial fitting and alignment of connected piping is completed. Level and align equipment of the concrete foundations, then entirely fill the space under base or bedplates with the specified non-shrink grout. Bevel exposed grout at 45 degree angle, except round exposed grout at horizontal surfaces for drainage. Trowel or point exposed grout to a smooth dense finish and damp cure with burlap for three days. When grout is fully hardened tighten nuts on anchor bolts. Check the installation for alignment and level, and perform approved corrective work as required to conform to the tolerances given in the applicable manufacturer’s instructions.

3.8 FIELD PAINTING: When equipment is specified elsewhere to be field painted, comply with Specification 09900 for execution. Mask or otherwise protect nameplates and data plates, lubricated items, seals, shafts, and other items not to receive coating from being coated.

3.9 OPERATIONAL DEMONSTRATION: Field services of the equipment manufacturer or their authorized and factory-trained representative shall be provided for installation support to the Contractor as necessary, and to check the finished installation and adjust equipment prior to startup and operational testing. The representative shall be experienced and knowledgeable of the installed equipment.

All equipment shall be field tested after installation and adjustment. All costs for manufacturer’s field services and for performing operations demonstrations and system tests shall be included in the Contract Price, and no extra payment will be made to the Contractor for costs required to perform and complete the demonstrations and validation tests. Requirements specified herein are in addition to the demonstration and test requirements specified for specific equipment


11005-7 65418833:3/29/2016

elsewhere in these Specifications. All testing shall be performed by the Contractor, with field support of the equipment manufacturer, in accordance with the submitted and approved procedure plans to demonstrate to the Engineer’s satisfaction that all components are fully and properly completed and operable; and that all systems operate with the efficiency, repeatability, and accuracy indicated and specified. Test schedules shall be established to allow continuous inspection by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall demonstrate that the performance of installed equipment complies with all requirements indicated and specified. The Contractor and each respective equipment manufacturer’s representative shall operate each equipment item through entire no-load to full- load range in accordance with the approved procedure for not less than 24 consecutive hours. Operate variable speed equipment to cycle through the applicable speed range at a steady rate of change. Induce simulated alarm and distressed operating conditions to test controls and protective devices for correct operation in adjusting system functions or causing system shutdown. Submit certified reports as specified herein.

3.10 TRAINING: The Owner shall be provided instruction in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. This instruction period shall be scheduled at least 10 days in advance with the Owner. The final approved copies of operation and maintenance manuals must have been delivered to the Owner prior to the instruction.

- END OF SECTION -

INTERIOR PROCESS PIPING – SECTION 15200

15200-1

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: The work to be performed in accordance with this Specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories, and performing of all operations needed for the construction of all interior piping, piping under structures and through walls, and piping to the outside of a wall pipe of any structure, or as shown on the Drawings.

Due to the diagrammatic nature of the Drawings, not all offsets, fittings, etc. which may be required may be shown. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test pipe, pipe supports, fittings, specials, and all required appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as required to make the entire piping system properly assembled and operable. Space requirements and locations of connections of equipment the Contractor proposes to furnish shall be fully investigated and vetted prior to ordering equipment or releasing items for fabrication. The Contractor shall not scale off the drawings to cut pipe or as a basis for making connections to equipment. Piping layouts or appurtenances which will not enter the openings or which will not adequately fit the assigned space will not be acceptable. All drawings relating to the construction, including architectural, structural, electrical, plumbing, piping, heating and ventilating, together with these specifications shall be considered collectively.

1.2 REFERENCES:



C. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

D. International Plumbing Code (IPC)

1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS: In accordance with Section 01300, submit:

A. Certificates of compliance.

B. Shop drawings, complete with dimensions and elevations, material, grade and class on all pipe, fittings, and couplings and on all joints, coatings, and appurtenances.

C. Detailed catalog and engineering data sheets for all items, components, and appurtenances, of sufficient quantity and content to demonstrate conformance with the specification requirements. Highlight or identify items proposed for use. Cross out extraneous items.

D. Proposed pipe support plan for all piping, except where pipe supports are specifically detailed on the Drawings.

E. Proposed schedule for delivering and installing the piping systems.

F. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.

G. Test results.


15200-2

1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and all other accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage to them. Under no circumstances shall any materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Skidding which damages protective coatings or primers will not be permitted.

All pipe and fittings shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be by the Contractor at their expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Any area damage beyond repair must be cut off and discarded.

B. Examination: All piping components and accessories shall be field inspected at the job

site and checked for conformance to these specifications. Pipe and fittings will be checked for out-of-round or damaged joints, interior and exterior surface damage, gasket damage and the other requirements listed herein. Any pipeline or appurtenant material found defective will be rejected. Any material rejected at the job site shall be marked “Rejected,” and the Contractor shall remove it immediately from the job site.

C. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall be stored

under opaque cover that does not transmit UV light.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL: All pipe, fittings, couplings, and appurtenant items shall be new, free from defects or contamination, and wherever possible shall be the standard product of the manufacturer. They shall be furnished in pressure or thickness classes as specified or shown. All pipe shall have joints as called for in the specifications or indicated on the Drawings.

2.2 HARDWARE MATERIALS: Unless specified otherwise, hardware used for the assembly of piping systems, flanges, joints, and appurtenances (including coupling bolts, tie rods, mechanical restraint systems, and the like) shall comply with the following:

A. Interior dry locations, or exterior above grade: Hot dip galvanized steel.

B. Moist locations (at a minimum, any interior or exterior space wholly or partially below grade level including vaults or pits, or having a wall or ceiling forming head space of part of a water channel or basin, shall be considered moist): Type 304 Stainless Steel.

C. Submerged locations and in corrosive areas (at a minimum, spaces with electrical classifications of Class 1 Division 1, and in chemical storage and pumping areas, shall be considered corrosive): Type 316 stainless steel.

D. Buried in earth: Type 316 stainless steel.

E. As an alternative to Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel where specified for flange assembly hardware, Contractor may at their option provide carbon steel hardware complying with ASTM A307 Grade B and coated with Tripac 2000 Blue or equivalent fluoropolymer coating system.


15200-3

2.3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE:

A. Pipe: Ductile iron pipe shall comply with AWWA C151/ANSI A21.51. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, provide Thickness Class 53 except that piping through concrete encasements, below slabs or structures, within sludge or sewage containing vessels, or otherwise inaccessible shall be Thickness Class 55.

B. Joints: Ductile iron pipe shall be flanged, push-on, or mechanical joint as shown on the

Drawings. In general, flanged pipe shall be used above ground or where exposed, while push-on or mechanical joint will be used where buried in earth.

Flanged joints shall conform to AWWA C115/ANSI A21.15 and ANSI B16.1 Class 125, except provide Class 250 when specifically shown on the Drawings or required for connection to equipment. Flanges shall be accurately shop faced and drilled true. Where tap or stud bolts are shown or otherwise required, flanges shall be tapped. Flanged pipe joints shall be made with full face gaskets of cloth inserted rubber compound, not less than 1/8-inch in thickness. EPDM compound shall be provided for sewage service. Gaskets shall be rated for at least 1.5 times the specified test pressure of the pipeline.

Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11. Gaskets shall be EPDM compound.

C. Fittings: Ductile iron. Comply with AWWA C110 or C153. Joint type and pressure rating

shall match those specified for the adjacent pipe and as shown on the Drawings. Wall pipe shall have collars integrally cast. Collars shall be located so as to be in the center of the concrete wall or floor into which they are to be placed.

D. Exterior Coating: Piping and fittings buried in earth and exposed within the valve vault

shall be furnished with asphalt coating per AWWA C151. Piping and fittings to be installed in submerged locations shall be supplied by the factory bare, for shop blasting and application of the specified submerged protective coating system. Asphalt coated pipe shall not be used in submerged locations.

E. Interior Lining: Piping and fittings conveying raw sewage shall be lined with ceramic epoxy;

Protecto 401 as manufactured by U.S. Pipe, or approved equal.

F. Joint Restraint: All pressurized ductile iron piping systems shall be fully restrained against thrust. Flanged connections are considered fully restrained. Push-on or mechanical joints shall be restrained through the use of concrete thrust blocking in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. Only when specifically allowed by the Engineer in writing, or if specifically shown on the Drawings, the following mechanical restraining systems may be substituted for thrust blocking:

Push-on joints: Restraint ring with serrated wedges on the spigot end of the pipe, with a split bell ring that engages behind the bell without serrations on the other. Ductile iron construction per ASTM A536 with protective coating, hardware material as specified elsewhere herein. EBBA Iron Megalug Series 1700 or approved equal.

Mechanical joints: Restraint ring with serrated wedges and incorporating a follower gland, designed to bolt to a mechanical joint drilling pattern. Ductile iron construction per


15200-4

ASTM A536 with protective coating, hardware material as specified elsewhere herein. EBBA Iron Megalug Series 1100 or approved equal.

2.4 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR PRESSURE SERVICE: Plastic pipe and fittings for pressure service, 3” and smaller in diameter, shall conform to the following requirements.

A. PVC Compound: Rigid, unplasticized compound for pipe and fittings shall conform to the

requirements of ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B with a minimum specific gravity of 1.35.

B. Pipe: Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1785, Schedule 80, Type LV, Grade 1, white in color, and the fiber stress for deriving the short-time burst pressure requirement in accordance with Table 6, therein, shall not be less than 6,000 psi at 73.4°F. Pipe shall bear National Sanitation Foundation Seal for potable water pipe and shall be marked with class, size, pressure rating, and name of manufacturer.

C. Fittings: Fittings shall be the same material as the pipe, white in color, and Schedule 80

conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2467.

D. Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Solvent cement and primer shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the schedule and size to be joined, and meet the requirements of ASTM D2564 and ASTM F656.

Flanges, where indicated or necessary for the connection of equipment or accessories, shall be of the same material as the pipe. Hardware material for use with PVC flanges shall be as specified elsewhere herein. Gaskets for flanged connections shall be of a Teflon envelope with a non-asbestos fiber or high polyment chloride resin core.

Provide threaded adapter fittings where indicated or required for connection to equipment or accessories. Use Military Specification T 27730A tape for threaded joints.

Unions shall be Schedule 80, have solvent weld end connections, threaded with O-ring gaskets.

2.5 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS:

A. Materials: Copper piping shall be seamless copper tubing, hard-drawn conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation B88, Type L where exposed, and Type K for buried service. Connection between pipes of dissimilar materials shall be made with the appropriate transition coupling including insulation for jointing pipes with potential galvanic reaction.

B. Fittings: Fittings shall be compression and hard-solder type as required. Flared type shall

be Parker-Hannefin Triple-Lock, American Brass Anaconda, Imperial-Eastman High-Seal, or equal. Hard solder fittings shall be wrought copper or cast brass conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation B62. Solder and flux shall be NSF 61 approved and contain less than 0.2% lead.

C. Hangers and Supports: Where copper piping is in direct contact with metal pipe supports,

a protective copper saddle shall be soldered to the underside of the pipe. Saddles may be of split copper pipe. Alternatively, provide felt or rubber-lined hangers


15200-5

designed for use with copper piping to provide galvanic isolation. Channel support clamps shall be Unistrut “Cush-A-Clamp” or equivalent.

2.6 SMALL PIPING VALVES: In general, small piping valves 3 inches and smaller in diameter shall be suitable for use with the contents being transported. Water piping valves shall be bronze complying with ASTM B62 with screwed end connections.

A. Gate valves shall be bronze of rising stem solid wedge disc type. Stuffing box repackable

while under pressure, 125-pound rating. Gate valves shall be similar and equal to Stockham Fig B 100C.

B. Globe valves shall be of bronze disc type with 125-pound rating and repackable while

under pressure, and shall be similar and equal to Stockham Fig B 13TC.

C. Check valves shall be bronze swing check disc type with integral disc and hinge, and 125-pound rating. Use Stockham B 319C or approved equal.

D. Corporation stops to be all bronze with tapered inlet threads with pipe outlet depending on

service line materials. Stops shall be approved equal to Ford Series F-1000. Saddles will be required in all PVC pipe. Saddles will be required on ductile-iron pipe in accordance with the standards established by the Ductile-Iron Pipe Research Association.

E. Ball valves in metallic piping shall be bronze body, chrome-plated ball with Teflon seats.

Threaded joint connections. Lever actuator. 400 psi WOG rating. Ball valves shall be Apollo 70-100, Watts B-6000, or approved equal.

F. Ball valves in PVC piping shall be PVC body, Teflon seats, EPDM O-ring seals (Viton if

used in chemical piping), solvent welded end connections with integral unions, rated for 150 psi at 74 degrees F. Asahi Pro Block, R&G Sloane, or approved equal.

2.7 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS: Flexible couplings shall be the types below as shown on the Drawings or as otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The flexible couplings shown on the Drawings are the minimum required; the Contractor may add as many as required to expedite the work subject to approval by the Engineer. Couplings shall provide the requisite pipe flexibility without jeopardizing pipe joint integrity due to hydraulic thrust or location of pipe supports, and shall have the same pressure-rating as the pipe. Couplings shall comply with AWWA C219 and have all metal bearing surfaces. Hardware shall comply with the materials specified elsewhere herein based on installation location. EPDM or NBR gaskets shall be used for raw sewage service.

A. Sleeve Type Couplings shall be properly gasketed and shall be of the diameter and type

recommended by the manufacturer to fit the outer diameter and type of pipe to which it is connecting. Each coupling shall consist of a ductile iron or steel middle ring, 2 ductile iron or steel followers, 2 gaskets, and the necessary bolts and nuts to compress the gaskets. The couplings shall be Smith Blair 411, 413, or 441 (as appropriate for the pipe type and pressure rating), or approved equal. Couplings to be fusion epoxy lined and coated. Polyethylene encase when buried in earth.

B. Flanged Coupling Adapters shall have a ductile iron body and flange, gaskets, and bolts

and nuts required to compress the gaskets. Flange shall be compatible with the flange


15200-6

to which it will mate. Fusion epoxy line and coat. Flanged coupling adapters shall be Smith Blair Model 912 or approved equal.

C. Restraint: Flexible couplings shall be fully restrained against thrust unless the Engineer

has given written approval to omit this feature for specific cases.

Exposed locations: Restraints shall consist of tie rod restraint harnesses as specified elsewhere herein. Megalug style serrated wedge restraint systems shall not be used unless specifically approved by the Engineer in writing. Anchor studs or set screws shall not be used for restraint.

Buried locations: Couplings shall be restrained by the use of concrete thrust blocks in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. Only when specifically allowed by the Engineer in writing, or if specifically shown on the Drawings, mechanically restrained couplings may be substituted for thrust blocking. Buried mechanically restrained couplings shall be ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536, with protective coating system. Hardware and bolts shall be as specified elsewhere herein for buried locations. Polyethylene encase in accordance with AWWA C105. EBBA Iron Series 3800 or approved equal.

2.8 WALL CASTINGS:

A. Wall Pipes: Ductile iron wall pipes shall have an integrally cast intermediate thrust collar

centered in the wall in which it is located, and have mechanical joint, flange or plain end connections as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be similar and equal to Clow figure numbers F-1426, F-1428, or F-1431, as required. Provide the same linings and coatings as those specified for the adjacent pipe. Coatings shall be compatible with embedment in concrete, or shall be omitted or removed by blasting from the portion embedded in the concrete. Wall pipe shall be Thickness Class 53 minimum. Provide tapped flange holes where flanges are shown flush with walls on the Drawings. Provide through flange holes where flanges are shown offset from walls facilitating use of standard flange assembly hardware.

B. Wall Sleeves: Wall and floor sleeves, through which pressurized carrier piping passes

independently, shall be minimum Thickness Class 50 ductile iron, fabricated or integrally cast with an exterior collar centered in the wall or slab in which it is located, and flush with the surface of the concrete on both sides.

2.9 WALL SLEEVE SEALING MATERIALS:

A. Wall Sleeve Sealant: The sealant shall be one of the following approved materials which will bond securely to concrete and steel, be watertight under continuous submergence, and will not contaminate water in any way. The material shall not harden materially when exposed to weather, and shall be suitable for application by caulking, knife, or gun. Certified test reports shall be submitted by the manufacturer on the actual batch of compound material furnished, showing compliance with the specifications before sealant is delivered. The several types shall conform to the following:

1. Lead caulking will not be permitted.

2. Polyurethane Compound: The compound shall be a polyurethane polymer that cures at ambient air temperature to a firm flexible, tear-resistant rubber designed


15200-7

for bonding to continuously submerged surfaces. It shall have cured physical properties meeting the requirements of ANSI A116.1 and Federal Specification TT-S-00227E; shall develop a Shore A hardness of between 22 and 40 after 7 days submergence in water; shall have 150 psi minimum tensile strength and 500 percent minimum elongation when tested in accordance with ASTM Designation D412 at 75EF; and shall be provided in gray color for nonsubmerged use and black for submerged use.

B. Joint Filler: The joint filler shall be glass fiber roving, or formed neoprene, butyl, or

polyurethanic type as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2.10 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: Pipe supports are not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for design and layout of supports. Pipe hangers, brackets, saddles, clamps and other supports shall be adjustable type conforming to the requirements of ANSI B31.1, Section 6. Supports shall have ample strength and rigidity to resist the hydraulic thrusts at changes in direction and at dead ends as well as the dead weight loads and the contents carried. Supports shall maintain required grade, prevent vibration, and allow expansion and contraction. Computations showing adequacy of hangers and supports to meet these requirements shall be submitted with the shop drawings.

A. General: Hangers and supports shall include all hanging and supporting devices of

metallic construction shown, specified, or required for pipe lines, apparatus, and equipment other than electrical equipment. The Contractor's working drawings, as required herein, shall show the quantity, type, design, and location of all hangers and supports required under the various contract items.

Except where otherwise shown, specified, or required, hangers, supports, anchors and concrete inserts shall be the standard types as manufactured by Crane Co., Anvil International, Fee and Mason Manufacturing Co., or equal meeting the requirements specified herein. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all hangers, supports, and concrete inserts shall be listed with the Underwriters' Laboratory. Chain or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted.

B. Design: Hangers and supports shall be adequate to maintain the pipelines, apparatus, and

equipment in proper position and alignment under all operating conditions. Supports shall be provided so that no weight shall be transmitted to any equipment to which the piping is connected and have springs where necessary. Hangers and supports shall be of standard design where possible, and be best suited for the service required, as approved by the Engineer. Where required, they shall be screw adjustable after installation. Supporting devices shall be designed in accordance with the best practice and shall not be unnecessarily heavy. Sufficient hangers and supports shall be installed to provide a working safety factor of not less than 12 for each hanger, assuming that the hanger is supporting 12 linear feet of pipe filled with water.

C. Supports for PVC Piping: Rigid plastic piping normally shall be supported by the same

type of hangers used with metallic pipe. Support spacing shall be based on the plastic pipe manufacturer's recommendations for the service conditions but not greater than 5 feet on center. Flexible plastic tubing or rigid plastic pipe operating at temperatures high enough to materially lower its strength, shall be supported continuously by light metallic angles or channels and special hangers.

D. Saddle Stands: Saddle stands shall be of the adjustable type. Each stand shall consist of

a length of wrought pipe fitted at the base with a standard screw threaded cast iron


15200-8

flange and at the top with an adjustable saddle or roll. The base flange shall be bolted to the floor or foundation. Stanchions shall be of similar construction to the saddle stand, except that they shall be fitted at the top with cast iron pipe saddle supports or with pipe stanchion saddles with yokes and nuts. Where adjustable supporting devices are not required, pipe lines 3 inches in diameter and smaller may be supported on approved cast iron, malleable iron, or wrought steel hooks, hook plates, ring or ring plates.

E. Pipe Anchors: Anchors shall be furnished and installed where specified, shown, or

required for holding the pipe lines and equipment in position or alignment. Pipe anchors shall be designed for rigid fastening to the structures, either directly or through brackets. The design of all anchors shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Pipe anchors shall be fabricated of materials as specified below based on installation location.

F. Inserts: Inserts for concrete shall be furnished and installed in the concrete structures

where required for fastening supporting devices. Coordinate with all trades as required to ensure inserts are included with the cast-in-place concrete work, or casting yard if structures are to be precast. They shall be designed to permit the rods to be adjusted to hang vertically. Nail slots shall be provided in the exposed flanges of the insert. Inserts shall be designed to carry safely the maximum load that can be imposed by the rod which they engage. Materials of fabrication shall be as specified below based on installation location.

G. Materials: Hangers and supports of metallic construction shall conform to the requirements

specified herein and to the following standards:

1. Structural Steel ASTM A36 and A283

2. Steel Bars (Grade 1022) ASTM A575

3. Steel Castings (Grade N-1) ASTM A27

4. Wrought Steel Pipe (Grade A, Schedule 40) ASTM A53

5. Cast Iron Pipe Fittings (Class 125) ANSI B16.1

6. Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A47

7. Bolting Materials, Steel a. Bolts, Yokes and Stud Bolts ASTM A307 b. Nuts ASTM A563 c. Physical requirements:

(1) Tensile strength 60,000 psi minimum (2) Yield strength 48,000 psi minimum (3) Elongation 27 percent maximum (4) Reduction of area 35-55 percent

8. Bolting materials, silicon bronze

a. Bolts, stud bolts yokes and nuts (alloy A) ASTM B98 b. Physical requirements:


15200-9

(1) Tensile strength 70,000 psi minimum (2) Yield strength 38,000 psi minimum (3) Elongation 17 percent maximum

9. Bolting materials, stainless steel

a. Bolts, stud bolts and nuts (Type 304 and 316) ASTM A276 b. Physical requirements:

(1) Tensile strength 75,000 psi minimum (2) Yield strength 30,000 psi minimum (3) Elongation 35 percent maximum (4) Reduction of area 45 percent maximum

10. Where specified or shown, bolts, stud bolts, rods, yokes and nuts of hangers and

supports shall be of silicon bronze or stainless steel as specified above with dimensions, threads and sizes equivalent to those specified in steel.

11. Provide support systems, including anchorages, of the following materials, as

specified above, based on installation location: a. Interior dry locations, or exterior above grade: Hot dip galvanized steel. b. Moist locations (at a minimum, any interior or exterior space wholly or

partially below grade level including vaults or pits, or having a wall or ceiling forming head space of part of a water channel or basin, shall be considered moist): Hot dip galvanized steel or Type 304 stainless steel.

c. Submerged locations (in raw or potable water): Type 304 stainless steel. d. Submerged locations (in raw sewage or process fluids) and in corrosive

areas (at a minimum, spaces with electrical classifications of Class 1 Division 1, and in chemical storage and pumping areas, shall be considered corrosive): Type 316 stainless steel or silicon bronze.

H. Brackets for Piping: Brackets for support of piping from walls and columns shall be

fabricated from materials specified herein based on installation location. When brackets are designed to support 1500 lbs. or more, back plates of adequate size and thickness shall be furnished and installed to distribute the load against the wall. When used on concrete walls the back plates shall be cast in the concrete. Where the use of back plates is not practicable, the brackets shall be fastened to the wall in such a manner that the safe bearing strength of the wall will not be exceeded. Pipe rolls or chairs shall be of the cast iron type. Pipe rolls shall be provided with threaded rods.

I. Spacing of Hangers: In some cases more stringent requirements are indicated on the

Drawings or elsewhere in these Specifications, but in no case shall the spacing of hangers exceed ten feet.

J. Where concentrations of valves, fittings and equipment occur, closer spacing of supports

will be required. In no case shall any total hanger load (weight of piping, insulation, and contents) exceed the following (based on load carrying capacities of hot rolled steel rod per ASTM A575. Load capacities shall be adjusted accordingly for other materials of construction).


15200-10

Nominal Rod

Diameter-inches Maximum Safe Load-Pounds

Nominal Rod Diameter-inches

Maximum Safe Load-Pounds

1/4 1,130 1-1/8 6,230 3/8 1,810 1-1/4 8,000 1/2 2,710 1-3/8 9,470 3/8 3,770 1-1/2 11,500 1 4,960 1-3/4 15,400

2.11 TIE ROD HARNESS (THRUST) RESTRAINTS: Where specified herein or required or shown on the Drawings for thrust restraint of piping accessories in exposed (unburied) locations, provide tie rod harness restraints. Restraints shall be consistent with AWWA Manual M11, Chapter 13. Hardware and rod materials shall be as specified elsewhere herein based on installation location.

Provide flange lugs (“dog ears”) attached to the nearest flanges on each side of the item to be restrained for anchorage of the tie rods. Tie rods shall not anchor directly to flange bolt holes. Flange lugs shall be fabricated from 3/4-inch thick structural steel plate and designed to fit the flange and bolt pattern of the flanges to which they are attached. Provide at least 2 tie rods per restraint, spaced equally around the pipe. Tie rods shall have a minimum yield stress of 46,000 psi. Double nut all tie rods to prevent loosening under vibration.

Megalug style serrated wedge restraint systems shall not be used as a substitute for tie rod harness restraints unless specifically approved by the Engineer in writing. Anchor studs or set screws shall not be used for restraint.

2.12 ANALOG PRESSURE GAUGES: Pressure gauges shall have 4 ½” dial with white face, 1/2” MPT bottom connection, phenolic turret case, liquid filled phosphor bronze bourdon tube. Accuracy shall be 1 percent of full scale. Each gauge installation shall include the gauge, shutoff valve, and a glycol or glycerin-filled bolt-through isolation ring sandwiched between pipe flanges (Ashcroft Type 81, or equal). Ring liner to be EPDM, 316 SS for wetted metal, coated carbon steel is acceptable for non-wetted metal. Gauges shall be mounted vertically. All gauges and accessories shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Gauges shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft, U.S Gauge, or approved equal. Pressure range of the gauge shall be as specified in the applicable equipment specifications. Pressure switches, transducers, and transmitters are specified elsewhere in the Specifications, if applicable. 2.13 NATURAL GAS ENGINE EXHAUST: Exhaust piping for the auxiliary pump drive engines shall be installed in accordance with the National Protection Association Code Numbers 99 and 100 and as approved by the local building and fire officials. The following general factors shall be incorporated into the installation:

2.13.1 To prevent water from draining back into the system, slant the horizontal pipe away from the engine and install a water trap at the lowest point. A rain cap should be fitted on exhaust pipes ending in the vertical position. 2.13.2 To prevent damage due to vibration and thermal expansion, flexible bellow type sections should be installed. Do not use bellows for required bends and alignment adjustment. 2.13.3 The exhaust system weight should be adequately supported and utilize robust material such as Schedule 40 black iron. The systems can be supported by various means but must remain flexible and the weight shall not be carried by the engine manifold and/or turbo-charger. Galvanized piping shall not be used in an exhaust system. 2.13.4 Accessories shall include a muffler/silencer of EGSA Class 3or better and a protective thimble where passing through combustible walls.

.


15200-11


15200-12

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL:

A. Care and Handling of Materials: All materials shall be carefully handled in all steps of

fabrication, storing, loading, transporting, unloading, storing at the site, and installation, using the means and following the procedures approved with the shop drawings.

Pipe slings used during handling, and tie-down straps during transit shall be not less than 4-inch wide flat fiber or plastic straps. During storage and in transit, pipe 8-inches and larger shall be rested on saddles or on another support system approved by the Engineer, which will ensure freedom from damage of the barrel, interior lining, and


15200-13

exterior coating. Not less than 3 saddles or other longitudinal pipe supports shall be used during transit.

B. Installation:

1. The different kinds of buried and above ground piping shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings, these specifications, and the procedures and methods approved with the shop and erection Drawings. Piping carrying liquids shall be installed without high points which could trap gasses and shall be kept below the static water level of the items which they connect. The interior of pipe, fittings, and couplings shall be clean and free from contamination when installed and effective means shall be taken to prevent the entrance of foreign matter during progress of the work. The types and sizes of pipes and fittings to be used shall be as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. Where required fittings are omitted from the Drawings, they shall be the same size as the piping and in all cases shall conform to the plumbing code requirements.

2. All pipe shall be carefully placed and supported at the proper lines and grades and

where practicable shall be sloped to permit complete drainage. Piping runs shown on the Drawings shall be followed as closely as possible, except for minor adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features or to suit the type or make of approved equipment purchased by the Contractor. If relocations are required, they shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Provisions for maximum flexibility are not always shown and the Contractor may add flexible joints where required and approved by the Engineer. Exposed pipe shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the adjacent walls and floors, unless shown differently on the Drawings.

3. All piping shall be installed as closely as possible to walls, ceilings, columns,

beams, and equipment (consistent with proper space requirements for maintenance and operational appurtenances) so as to occupy the minimum of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish this must be furnished by the Contractor at their own expense.

C. Joints: In erecting the pipe, a sufficient number of screw unions of flanged joints shall be

used to allow any section or run of pipe to be disconnected without taking down adjacent runs. Screw unions may be employed on pipelines 3 inches in diameter and under. Flanged joints shall be employed on pipe 4 inches in diameter or larger unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Dielectric unions or flange insulation kits are to be installed at the junction of dissimilar metals.

D. Verification of Dimensions: All dimensions essential to the correct location of the pipe, or

fit of piping at equipment and valves, or to the proper location and orientation of pipe sleeves and wall castings, or to the avoidance of obstructions or conflict with other improvements, shall be accurately determined by the Contractor prior to fabrication of the piping involved. Any required change from the nominal locations shown of the Drawings shall be made by the Contractor and shall be included as a part of the work hereunder and be subject to the approval of the Engineer.


15200-14

3.2 BURIED PIPING:

A. Buried Pipe Installation: Buried piping shall be laid to the grades and alignment shown on the Drawings, and all trenching, bedding, and backfilling shall conform to the application requirements of Sections 02520 and 02614. Conform to the following sections of AWWA Standard C600: Section 1.2, Work Included; Section 2, Inspection; Section 3, Responsibility for Material; Section 4, Handling of Material; Section 5, Alignment and Grade; Section 7, Laying; Section 9b, Joining of Mechanical Joint Pipe; Section 10, Setting of Valves and Fittings; and Section 12, Anchorage. The foregoing requirements shall govern the work, regardless of the type of pipe installed unless a more stringent requirement is specified.

1. When the work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely

closed. The piping shall be placed when trench and weather conditions are suitable. No pipe shall be laid in water, and responsibility for the diversion of drainage and dewatering of trenches during construction shall be borne by the Contractor. In all backfilling operations, the Contractor shall be responsible for damage to or misalignment of the pipe.

2. When required in Sections 02520 and 02614, a tracer wire, with loose ends

accessible at valve boxes, cleanouts, or other suitable method for access, shall be buried over all nonmetallic piping to be laid underground. Detectable or non- detectable buried warning tape shall be installed within the backfill above all buried pipelines as specified in Sections 02520 and 02614, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.

3. Joints of all sizes shall conform to the applicable requirements specified hereinafter

for aboveground piping. Care shall be taken to keep pipe in correct alignment when making joints. Friction or lever pullers or other approved means of ensuring straight pulling shall be used on pipe larger than 8 inches and also on smaller sizes where damage to the end might occur. The use of "popping-on" of joints will not be permitted. The fitting of piping to valves, hydrants, and wall castings shall be worked out in advance of installation to ensure correct orientation of the mating ends and bedding of approach piping.

4. When pipe (except copper or wrought steel) passes from a structure, manhole,

vault, encasement, or the like to the earth, a bell and spigot, wedgelock, ringtite, or other flexible-type joint or coupling shall be installed within two feet of the structure. Particular care shall be taken to secure full support to the pipe in the earth.

B. Thrust Blocks: Thrust Blocks shall be installed in accordance with Section 02614.

C. Coverage: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all buried piping shall have a coverage of at least 3 feet between the top of the pipe and the finished surface. Variations from the pipeline grade and alignment may be allowed to accommodate fabrication with the approval of the Engineer. All changes of grade shall require the approval of the Engineer on the installation Drawings.

3.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING:

A. Aboveground Pipe Installation: All piping shall be installed in accordance with the erection drawings and the erection procedure submitted with the approved shop or


15200-15

erection drawings. The horizontal piping shall be run parallel to the building walls and shall be level except where otherwise shown or specified; parallel lines shall be grouped on the same horizontal or vertical plane wherever possible. Vertical piping shall be plumb, and the entire piping configuration shall allow adequate clearances for the actuation of valves, and for convenient access for painting and preventive maintenance of valves and other accessories. Piping shall clear obstructions, preserve headroom, and keep openings and passageways clear. If structural difficulties or other work prevent the running of pipes or the setting of equipment at the point indicated on the Drawings, the necessary minor deviations as determined by the Engineer, will be allowed, and shall be shown on the erection drawings to be furnished. Except as otherwise shown or specified, piping installation work shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B31.1.0 and the printed or written recommendations of the manufacturer of the product involved for the given conditions.

B. Joint Installation: Installation of joints and couplings shall conform to the following

requirements:

1. Joints and Couplings: Joints and couplings shall be made in accordance with the specified requirements made part of the erection procedure submitted by the Contractor.

2. Pipe Threads: Pipe threads shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI

B2.1, and shall be cut full and free from torn or ragged surfaces. No more than three threads on the pipe at any joint shall remain exposed after installation. Threaded joints shall be established with joint compound applied to the male ends only. The use of thread cement or caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leakage will not be permitted. Sharp-toothed pipe wrenches or similar wrenches shall not be used in making up copper or brass pipe.

3. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made with the gaskets specified for the

pipeline service centered in the joint. Bolts studs, and nuts shall be lubricated with graphite and oil so that the nuts can be turned by hand. Install anti-galling compound on stainless steel bolt and nut threads to prevent seizing. Care shall be taken to prevent excessive initial tension to the bolt and studs and so that the tension applied is as nearly uniform as possible. The rust preventive compound applied to the faces of flanges before shipment shall be removed before installation. Where slip-on flanges are used, they shall be fillet welded to the pipe on both front and back sides. Where raised faced and flat faced flanges are joined, the raised face flange shall be ground smooth and full face gaskets shall be used.

4. Tubing:

a. Tubing which is to be soldered shall be cut square and all burrs shall be removed. Both the inside of the fitting and the outside of the tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings or hard-drawn tubing when making connections. Joints for soldered fittings shall be made with a non-corrosive, paste flux and solid string or wire solder composed of 95-5 tin-antimony solder. Soft solder or cored solder will not be permitted. Tubing to be coupled with flared compression type fittings shall conform to the applicable provisions of the Joint Industry Conference (JIC) Standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer.


15200-16

b. All concealed piping shall be tested in the presence of the Engineer before concealing. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings. Kinks and wrinkles shall not be acceptable.

5. Flexible Type Joints of the sleeve, split sleeve, and flanged coupling adapter types

of flexible couplings shall be made in accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer. The pipe ends to receive the couplings shall be finished to the outside diameter and surface finish required by the coupling manufacturer. Prior to assembly, all surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation shall be given protective coating.

6. Tie Rod Restraint Harnesses shall be provided at flexible type joints where shown

on the Drawings and as required. The harnesses shall be tightened just sufficiently to preclude displacement of the downstream piping under hydraulic thrust. Double nut all rods to prevent loosening under vibration.

7. Electrical/Dielectric Insulation shall be provided at all connections between ferrous

and nonferrous pipe except where the nonferrous pipe is an electrical nonconductor. The joint shall be tested after completion to verify nonconductivity. Flange isolation kits shall be PSI, APS, or approved equal. Dielectric unions shall be Epco or approved equal.

8. PVC Pipe Joints at fittings and couplings to valves and equipment shall be made

in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

C. Pipe Sleeves: All piping which will pass through walls, slabs, footings, or beams shall be provided with specified pipe sleeves with annular space sealed or with wall castings. The Contractor shall provide the wall sleeves and castings for insertion in the concrete work covered in Section 03300, Cast in Place Concrete, and shall verify their correct setting prior to concrete placement. The sleeve sealant shall be as specified in Part 2 herein. No pipe joint will be allowed to occur in the sleeve. The seal on both ends of the sleeve shall be flush with the concrete surfaces on completion of work and drying of sealant. Caulking and sealing of wall sleeves shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Preparation for Sealing: The annular space between the pipe and sleeve shall be

cleaned of all loose particles and contamination, and shall be dry prior to sealing. Tape or other recommended protection shall be applied on the structure surfaces to preclude contamination by the sealant, and any contamination which occurs shall be removed immediately, followed by a thorough washing of the surfaces with solvent. Prepared compound not used during the application time limits designated by the manufacturer of such compound shall be discarded.

2. Application of Compound Sealant: The sealing shall be performed after any

required primer has been applied and backup material placed. The work shall be performed in accordance with the submitted erection drawing detail and procedure, and all grooves shall be solidly filled. The application shall be made in clean, straight lines free of wrinkles, be tooled as required and finished with a convex surface just sufficient to provide the required flush surface upon drying. Work shall not be performed when the air temperature is below 50°F.


15200-17

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE:

A. Pipe Laying:

1. Inspection: All pipe shall be carefully inspected by the Engineer for defects before installation. Such inspection shall include light tapping with a hammer while the pipe is suspended in the air. No pipe or fittings which are cracked or which show defects excluded by the Specifications for such pipe or fittings shall be used. Any injuries to the protective coating of the pipe or fittings shall be carefully repaired by the Contractor.

2. Cleanliness of Material: All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be carefully leaned

before installation. Every open end of a pipe shall be carefully plugged or capped before leaving the work.

3. Positioning: For bell and spigot pipe, the direction of bells shall normally face

upstream of the flow. This direction may be altered with the permission of the Engineer. Bells and spigots must be thoroughly cleaned and free from oil, grease, blisters, and excess coating before spigots are inserted into bells. The spigot end of the pipe shall be brought to true line and grade and be inserted to the full depth of the socket before the joints are made. The inner surface of the pipe shall conform at the joints, and the annular space for he jointing material shall be of uniform width and depth. If any pipe does not allow sufficient space or jointing material, it shall be replaced by one of proper dimensions.

4. Deflection: The maximum deflection in bell and spigot cast or ductile iron joints

shall be no more than half that specified by the manufacturer.

B. Thrust Restraint: Tie rod harness restraints shall be used above ground where there is a possibility of pulling the joint under pressure. Tie rod restraints are not to be where buried in earth, unless specifically allowed by the Engineer in writing. Instead, concrete thrust blocks are to be used, or when approved by the Engineer Megalug style serrated wedge mechanical restraints as specified may be used as specified.

C. Piping Through Walls: Where pipes pass through walls or floors, care shall be exercised

to ensure joints being watertight. The pipe shall be free of all dirt, incompatible coatings, and grease to secure a tight bond with the concrete.

D. Push-on or Mechanical Joints: Joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Installation shall be in

accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. Gasket seats and rubber gaskets shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembly. The completed joint shall have a uniform contact by the gasket between the outer surface of the spigot and the gasket seat of the bell.

E. Flanged Joints: Flanged pipe shall be cut true to length. Joints shall be made up square,

with even pressure upon the gaskets and shall be perfectly watertight. Gaskets shall fit the inside dimension of the pipe accurately, so that no surplus material projects out into the flow area. The completed joint shall be smooth and properly aligned.


15200-18

3.5 TESTING AND CLEANUP:

A. After each of the systems has been installed, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all parts of the installation. All equipment, piping, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings, and other debris. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to any of the work due to the Contractor's failure to properly install or to properly clean the systems shall be repaired without cost to the Owner.

B. Following the cleaning, each system shall be completely tested in the presence of

the Engineer and to his satisfaction, and all equipment shall be adjusted to operate in the most efficient and satisfactory manner. Only such tests shall be made as will demonstrate that each line will be leakfree. Refer to Sections 02520 and 02614 for Testing of Pipe Lines.

- END OF SECTION -

VALVES, METERS AND ACCESSORIES – SECTION 15215

15215-1 654188335:3292016

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: The work to be performed in accordance with this specification consists of providing and installing all valves, meters and accessories as specified, indicated, and required. See Section 15200 for small (3-inch and smaller) valves.

1.2 REFERENCES:


B. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS: In accordance with Section 01300, submit:

A. Manufacturer’s literature and product data sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the specification requirements. Highlight proposed products and features, cross out extraneous information.

B. Certificates of compliance.

C. In addition to product data, also submit, installation and calibration procedure, manufacturer’s recommended upstream and downstream straight piping lengths, operation and maintenance manuals, factory test and field test results, and parts lists for flow meters.

D. In addition to product data, also submit installation instructions, seating and unseating heads, and shop drawings that include dimensions and anchor bolt pattern for fabricated slide gates.

E. In addition to product data, submit dimensions, pump curves, electrical requirements, and controls information for the sump pump.

1.4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION:

A. Valves shall have pressure rating not less than the adjacent piping unless otherwise indicated. Valves shall be provided with pipe supports on either side of the valve. Assemblies of valves, operators, and accessories shall be complete and adequate for the intended purpose and shall include all essential components of equipment together with all mountings and other appurtenances normal and necessary for proper installation, whether or not indicated or specified. Direction of rotation to open each valve shall be to the left (counter-clockwise). Each valve body or operator shall have cast thereon the work “OPEN” and an arrow indicating the direction to open.

B. Exposed (non-buried) valves shall be hand wheel operator with indicators. Handwheel

actuators shall be designed to produce the required torque with a minimum pull of 80 pounds. The handwheel shall be manufactured of cast-iron finish coated with epoxy or enamel.

C. Buried valves shall be non-rising stem, nut operated with position indicators. Provide valve box and cover.


15215-2 654188335:3292016

D. Meters shall be electromagnetic type flow meter for measurement of raw sewage.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUG VALVES:

A. Plug valves shall be the non-lubricated eccentric plug type rectangular body, full port. Valves shall open from fully open to tight closure in one-quarter (90°) turn and shall have an indicator to show plug position. Port area shall be 100% of the cross sectional area of the connecting pipe. Valve plugs, bearings, and seals shall be easily removable for repair or replacement without removing the valve body from the pipeline in which it is installed. Exposed valve connections shall be 125 lb. ANSI B16.1 flanges. Buried valve connections shall be mechanical joint. Flange and mechanical joint assembly hardware shall be as specified in Specification 15200 based on the installation location. Valve material shall be compatible with sewage and shall be as follows:

Body: Cast iron, fusion epoxy lined and coated per AWWA C550 Plug: Cast iron with neoprene/EPT coating Bearings: Type 316 stainless steel Seals: Adjustable “V” type of Buna N Seating Surface: Nickel or 316 stainless steel

Each plug valve shall be supplied with its own worm gear, hand wheel operator, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Operator extensions shall be provided where required to avoid interference with adjacent equipment, piping, walls, etc. Provide nut operator with valve box and cover for valves that are buried in earth. Covers shall be marked “sewer”. The valves shall be DeZurik or Milliken.

2.2 BALL CHECK VALVES: Check valves shall be cast iron body, Buna-N covered metal ball, 125 lb. flanged connections, sinking ball type check valves, suitable for horizontal mounting and use with raw sewage. Valves shall be fusion epoxy lined and coated per AWWA C550. Flange assembly hardware shall be as specified in Specification 15200 based on the installation location. Valves shall be Golden Anderson Ball Check Valve Figure No. 242-D, or Flygt HDL.

2.3 SLIDE GATES: Slide gates shall be furnished complete with stem guides, slide, frame, seals, stems, operators, wall thimbles, wedges, and all appurtenances required to make a complete and properly operational gate as shown on the Drawings and specified. Comply with AWWA C560.

Materials of construction:

Frame, slide, brackets, and wall thimble: Cast iron per ASTM A126. Wedges: Manganese Bronze or Silicon Bronze, ASTM B584. Seating faces: Silicon Bronze, ASTM B98. Stems and couplings: Type 316 stainless steel (Type 304 is not acceptable).

Fasteners, studs, and assembly hardware: Type 316 stainless steel (Type 304 is not acceptable). Protective coatings: In accordance with the manufacturer’s standard for raw sewage applications.


15215-3 654188335:3292016

Provide non-rising stem with 2-inch operating nut. A maximum of 40 pounds of pull shall be required to operate the gate. Hydro Gate Series HG560, equivalent model by Rodney Hunt, or approved equal.

Wall thimble length shall extend the thickness of the wall in which it is installed. Ends shall be plain end x square flanged (“F” type) sized for the slide gate frame. Provide water stop collar centered within the wall.

The seating head on the gate shall be equal to the head differential between the surface elevation of the wet well structure and gate invert shown on the Drawings, acting from the wet well inlet forebay toward the wet well interior. The unseating head on the gate shall be equal to the head differential between the elevation of the center wet well dividing wall and gate invert shown on the Drawings, acting from within the wet well toward the forebay.

2.4 METERS: Electromagnetic flow meters shall be in line units suitable for use with raw sewage. Meters shall have an accuracy of 0.5% of the measured reading. Metering tube shall be metallic lined in hard rubber with 125 lb. flanged ends. Electrodes and grounding rings shall be type 316 Stainless Steel. Provide a grounding circuit for each meter. Signal converter shall be remotely mounted up to 50 ft. from the meter. Output shall be 4-20 mA. The signal converter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure. The signal converter shall have a seven digit, non-reset totalizer on the face of the device. The readout shall indicate flow in selectable units of GPM, CFS, and MGD. Units shall be certified for Class 1, Division 2 locations. No exceptions. Meters shall be factory tested. Perform a factory test and provide certification of calibration. Test the flow tube, transmitter and converter as an integral assembly. Discharge meters shall be Toshiba LF654 Mount Anywhere electromagnetic flow meters. 2.5 SEWAGE AIR RELEASE VALVE: Releases accumulated air under pressure. Valve shall be designed specifically for use in raw sewage applications. Single body. Pipe connection (valve inlet) size: 2-inches. Pipeline operating pressure is 20 psig, which may drop to less than 5 psig when the pumps are not operating. Rubber compound shall be selected accordingly based on the provided pressures. All internal metallic components shall be 316 stainless steel construction. Valve shall be A.R.I. Model D-025; or Owner-approved equivalent.

2.6 SUMP PUMP: Self-contained package consisting of pump and float controls. 115V single phase, 1/3-HP max power draw. Automatic resetting thermal motor protection. Carbon-ceramic mechanical seal, field replaceable, standard size. 1/2-inch (minimum) solids handling size in pumped liquid. Cast iron or bronze body and impeller. Model shall be suitable for installation within an 18-inch diameter sump. Zoeller “Mighty-Mate” Model 57 with vertical mechanical float, or Owner-approved equivalent.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED VALVES: Valves shall be rigidly held in place using supports or hangers on each side of the valve. The stem orientation of valves in elevated piping shall be as approved by the Engineer for operator accessibility. Saddle type valve supports shall be provided for all valves and shall be consistent with Specification 15200. Supports shall be of rugged construction providing at least 120° under-support for the valve, shall be adjustable, and shall be securely anchored to the foundations using anchor bolts of materials specified for hardware in Specification 15200 based on the installation location. Valves shall be operated and adjusted before installation. Valves shall be tested with adjacent piping.


15215-4 654188335:3292016

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BURIED VALVES AND VALVE BOXES: The valves shall be set in true alignment and grade in accordance with the requirements of this specification. Valves shall be operated and all adjustments and operating settings of valves and appurtenances shall be made prior to installation. The valve boxes shall be checked for centering plumb over the operating nut and to ensure that the box cover is flush with the finish grade. Earth backfill shall be carefully tamped around each valve box to prevent displacement.

Provide concrete support under all buried plug valves. Provide a 12-inch minimum width and 8-inch minimum thickness concrete collar at grade around all valve boxes and covers installed in graded areas. Where valves are installed in sidewalk or pavement, valve covers shall be adjusted flush with the finished surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION SPECIFICS FOR PLUG VALVES: Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, eccentric plug valves shall be installed with the shaft horizontal with the plug in the upper half of the body, with the seat on the upstream end.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SLIDE GATES: Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Comply with AWWA C560 and C561.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF METERS: Meter shall be rigidly held in place with supports on both sides of the meter. Mount the converter and readout in a visible and accessible location near the control panel shown on the Drawings.

Meters shall be field tested against a secondary standard at the expected flow rates of the facility. At their option, Contractor may install a second flow device of known calibration in the line to verify device calibration, or perform fluid capacity tests such as volumetric measurement per unit time.

Submit certificates of compliance from meter manufacturer stating that the meters have been properly installed, tested, and are ready for operation.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SEWAGE AIR RELEASE VALVES: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. The inlet shall be connected to the pipeline utilizing 316 stainless steel schedule 40 nipples. Provide an isolation plug valve on the inlet. Plumb the valve outlet to discharge to the wet well utilizing schedule 40 PVC. Provide a PVC union located near the valve outlet to facilitate disassembly.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF SUMP PUMP: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Discharge line to be schedule 40 PVC, same size as pump discharge connection. Provide PVC union and check valve on discharge piping. Test automated operation at least 2 times by filling sump with water.

- END OF SECTION -

HEATING AND VENTILATION – SECTION 15700

15700-1 65418833:3/29/2016

PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: The work to be performed in accordance with this specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories required, and of performing all operations needed in connection with furnishing and installing a complete and operable heating and ventilating systems.

The contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, fees, taxes, royalties, licenses, and inspections in connection with the heating and ventilating system. Upon completion of the work, furnish to the Engineer a certificate of inspection and final approval by the local inspection authority.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. National Board of Fire Underwriters

B. All adopted local and state codes and ordinances

1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS: In accordance with Section 01300. Submit certificates of compliance with manufacturer’s literature. Manufacturer’s literature shall be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements. Submit exhaust fan sizing calculations.

1.4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION: The Contractor shall provide without extra charge, all incidental items required, as a part of the work, even though not particularly specified or indicated. The installation shall be so made that its several component parts will function together as a workable system, and shall be left in a properly adjusted and working order. The Contractor shall show on a set of plans in red ink all changes from the original plans made during installation of work and file with Engineer when work is complete.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 EXHAUST FAN AND LOUVERS:

A. Fan to be sidewall exhaust fan. Fan performance shall be sized by the equipment supplier to provide 200 CFM airflow at a water column pressure corresponding to the specified intake and exhaust housings, louvers and control dampers. Submit calculations to the Engineer for review demonstrating compliance. The motor shall be no greater than 1/5 hp, 115 VAC, 1-phase. Motor shall include vibration isolation, and NEMA-1 junction box and switch. Accessories and options shall include appropriately sized intake and exhaust louvers and thermostat. The Exhaust Fan shall energize above 85 degrees F (adjustable), as sensed by the thermostat, and de-energize below 75 degrees F (adjustable), and shall be provided with override switch and mechanical timer for manual operation.

2.2 UNIT HEATER:

A. A. Unit Heater: One wall or ceiling mounted electric unit heater shall be installed at the location shown on the Drawings. It shall be equal or similar to a Comfort Zone Industrial Steel Electric Ceiling Mount Heater with 3 Heat Levels up to 5,000 watts. Heater shall maintain a set temperature and utilize a separate wall mounted thermostat.

HEATING AND VENTILATION – SECTION 15700

15700-2 65418833:3/29/2016

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK: The Contractor will be held solely responsible for the proper size and location of all anchors, chases, recesses, openings, etc., required for the proper installation of the work. Arrange for the building of anchors, etc., and for the leaving of the required chases, recesses, openings, etc. and do all cutting and patching made necessary caused by failure or neglect to make such arrangements with other trades. Any cutting or patching done by the Contractor shall be subject to the directions of the Engineer and shall not be started until approval has been obtained. Workmanship shall be top quality. The neat and slightly appearance of the finished work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical efficiency. All work shall be done in accordance with good commercial practices.

All mechanical equipment provided under this Contract shall operate without any sound or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer. Objectionable sound or vibration conditions shall be corrected in an approved manner by the Contractor at his expense. Vibration control shall be by means of approved vibration eliminators in a manner as recommended by the manufacturer of the eliminators.

3.2 POST INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner’s personnel in the proper operation of the heating and ventilating equipment. The Contractor shall monitor and tabulate the amperage, voltage, and air flow for each fan and heater. Registers having opposed blade dampers shall be adjusted to distribute air evenly throughout and area. Balancing shall be accomplished under the presence of the Engineer by a firm experienced in testing, adjusting and balancing the mechanical equipment. Tabulated data including, at a minimum, motor amperage, input voltage, nameplate data, operating speed, and heater capacity shall be provided to the Engineer for his approval. The Contractor shall perform a complete operational test to confirm that the heating and ventilation systems operate according to this specification.

- END OF SECTION -

Supplemental Specification: Section1600 Page 1 of 2

Adobe Power LLC

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 1600

GENERAL

1600.1 GENERAL

1600.1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Furnish labor, equipment, tools, materials, supplies, and perform all operations in accordance with the current, adopted National Electrical Code, and State of Colorado Electrical Code. Expectations for this project are such that, every effort is made at every opportunity to exceed the minimum standard established by the National Electrical Code.

Furnish labor, equipment, tools, materials and supplies required to make a completely electrically operable system of the equipment furnished under other Divisions of this Specification and as outlined on the Drawings.

1600.1.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

The Drawings are not intended to and do not show all equipment such as junction boxes, outlet boxes, conduit, fittings, mounting and miscellaneous hardware, and similar. Even though such items may not be specifically mentioned in the Specifications nor shown on the Drawings, nor noted on Shop Drawings, if they are necessary to make a complete installation, include them in the work required under this Division.

1600.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Use only thoroughly trained experienced and appropriately licensed personnel who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the specified items to fabricate, install, and test the work of this Division.

Where the Specifications or Drawings call for equipment or methods to be of better quality or higher standards than required by referenced Codes or Standards, the Specifications and Drawings shall prevail.

1600.1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS

When requesting substitution of methods, material or equipment, comply with the General Conditions of the Contract. Include as part of the request detailed drawings showing all resultant changes to the electrical work.

The design of certain equipment may be related to factors not immediately obvious. Changes in design of equipment may require technical justification, or require changes be made in other equipment to match the proposed changes, or require the equipment be supplied as specified, or any combination of the above, at no additional cost to the Owner.

Supplemental Specification: Section1600 Page 2 of 2

When the product of a specific manufacturer is indicated on the Drawings, or called for solely by catalog number or trade name, it has been done to fix standards of workmanship, finish, and design required for this installation. The guaranteed performance of a product proposed as a substitute for one called for shall also conform to, or exceed, these standards.

1600.1.5 LOCATION OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT

The Drawings or other Specification sections define the approximate location of services, cabinets, panelboards, switches, lights, receptacles, and other equipment. Determine the most suitable location by actual measurement during construction. Maintain clearance required by NEC Article 110. Propose final location and obtain approval of the Engineer in advance of installation.

Coordinate location and configuration of electrical work with the work of other trades to avoid interference, to assure convenient access for operation and maintenance of equipment, for optimum luminary placement, and for neat appearance.

1600.1.6 SIZE AND RATING OF MATERIALS

The size and rating of the conductors, conduits, over current protection devices, disconnect devices, motor starters, and other related equipment used to provide and control electric supply to the various power consuming equipment furnished under this contract has been determined based on the requirements of the specified equipment. If the equipment actually furnished causes the rating of any of these materials to be exceeded:

Consult with the Engineer to determine the changes necessary to provide and control electric supply to the equipment furnished, and

Install the agreed upon materials at no increase in the contract amount or time.

END OF SECTION

Supplemental Specifications: Section1604 Page 1 of 2

Adobe Power LLC

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 1604

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS (ELECTRICAL)

1604.1 GENERAL

1604.1.1 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

Maintain a complete set of Contract Drawings in “Record” condition. Mark, initial, and date changes, modifications, or corrections as they occur.

Show by dimensions and by correct scale the location and burial depth of underground conduits, duct banks, conduit stubouts, and direct buried cables. Show location and depth at each end and at every bend.

Show all differences between electrical and instrumentation design and the actual construction of electrical and instrumentation systems. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

Location of electrical conduits concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.

Field changes of dimension and detail.

Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.

Details not on original contract drawings.

Have the Drawings available for inspection by the Engineer during standard work hours at the project site.

Furnish the "Record" Contract Drawings to the Engineer after completing the work and tests.

1604.1.2 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS

Maintain a complete set of Shop Drawings in “Record” condition. Mark, initial and date changes, modifications, or corrections as they occur.

Return field marked Shop Drawings to the respective manufacturer who shall transfer “Record” markings to the original drawings, stamp the new drawings “Record” and place the date adjacent to the stamp. Submit 6 sets to the Engineer.

Where a connection diagram is required as part of the submittals for a section of these Specifications, the Record documents for that section shall include copies of the connection diagrams that show all field interconnection information. Where a wire goes to a field device, such as a STOP pushbutton, the interconnection information may simply say “STOP pushbutton, field.” Where a wire goes to an equipment where it is terminated on a terminal board, show the wire destination by equipment name or

Supplemental Specifications: Section1604 Page 2 of 2

abbreviation, then terminal board number, then terminal point number, AFD1-B-6 for example.

1604.1.3 LEGIBILITY

Materials that are not sufficiently legible to the Engineer may be returned without being reviewed.

Materials of marginal legibility may be accepted for preliminary review but rejected for use as final Record Documents.

Minimum text height on project-specific submittal drawings such as schematics, connection diagrams, loop diagrams, and similar: ⅛ inch.

1604.1.4 PAYMENT

The Engineer will not recommend final payment for the project until the requirements of the above paragraphs are fulfilled.

END OF SECTION

Supplemental Specifications: Section 1611 Page 1 of 10

Adobe Power LLC

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATION SECTION 1611

GROUNDING AND BONDING

1611.1 GENERAL

1611.1.1 Section Includes

1. Main Grounding Electrode System

2. Circuit and System Grounding

3. Enclosure and Equipment Grounding System

4. Signal Reference Grid

1611.1.2 References

1. NEC 2017

2. IEEE

3. ISA

4. NFPA

1611.1.3 Drawings

1. The drawings, which constitute a part of these specifications, indicate the general grounding and bonding to be used in this contract. Data presented on these drawings are as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. Accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification, of all dimensions, routing, etc., is directed.

2. Specifications and drawings are schematic in nature. Exact routing, locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor is directed to make field surveys as part of his work prior to submitting Grounding and Bonding connection drawings.

1611.1.4 Submittals

Submit the following in:

1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data for grounding conductors, grounding clamps, grounding bushings, grounding plates, grounding bars, chemical ground rods, exothermic weld materials, compression grounding connector materials, static grounding materials, and signal reference grid materials.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for signal reference grid fabrication and installation.

3. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents to include specified certifications and field test reports of installed grounding systems.


1611.1.5 Regulatory Requirements

1. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) for components and installation.

2. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

1611.1.6 Receiving, Storing, and Protecting

1. Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.

1611.2 PRODUCTS

1611.2.1 Product Options and Substitutions

1. Alternate products may be accepted as engineer-approved equal.

1611.2.2 Ground Electrode Cable

1. Provide bare stranded, soft temper copper cable that conforms to ASTM B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors.

1611.2.3 Ground Electrode Backfill Material

1. Provide ground enhancement backfill material for ground rods and cable type electrodes.

2. Field-mixed backfill material shall consist of approximately 75 percent gypsum (calcium sulfate), 20 percent bentonite clay, and 5 percent sodium sulfate.

3. Commercial backfill material, when at 300% moisture content ((weight of water/weight of material)x 100), shall have a resistivity of approximately 250 ohm-cm at 30% solids density and a pH of 8 to 10.

4. Manufacturers: Lyncole “Lynconite”, LEC Inc. “GAF”, Superior Grounding Systems “Electro-Fill”

1611.2.4 Equipment Grounding Conductors

1. Provide NRTL-listed THHN/THWN insulated copper wire.

2. Use solid grounding conductors 10 AWG and smaller where not subject to vibration or repeated flexing.

3. Use stranded grounding conductors for 8 AWG and larger.

4. Use stranded grounding conductors where subject to vibration or repeated flexing. Use stranded grounding conductors in flexible conduit at motor connections.

5. Color code grounding conductors as follows:

a. Equipment ground:

Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation.


Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation or black colored insulation with 3/4 inch wide band of water and oil-resistant green plastic adhesive tape.

b. Isolated ground:

Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe.

Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe or black colored insulation with 3/4 inch wide bands of water and oil-resistant green and yellow plastic adhesive tape.

1611.2.5 Ground Bar

1. Provide ground bar, 12 inches long or greater length as indicated on the Drawings, fabricated from 1/4 inch thick, 4 inch wide copper stock with (1” + 3/4") x 2" bolt hole pattern to accept NEMA standard lugs. Mount ground bar on 2700 volt standoff insulators.

2. Provide 25 ft 4/0 AWG copper pigtail exothermically welded to the ground bar.

1611.2.6 Ground Plates

1. Provide ground plates designed for flush mounting in concrete structures.

2. Furnish copper alloy castings with four 1/2” x 13 threaded holes at 1.75" x 1.75" NEMA spacing and a welding stud or compression connection suitable for 2 AWG to 250 kcmil copper conductor.

3. Furnish NRTL-listed ground plates that are suitable for direct burial and have been tested successfully according to the requirements of IEEE Std. 837 IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.

1611.2.7 Pipe Grounding Connectors

1. Provide NRTL-listed copper-alloy connectors for making cable to pipe connections.

2. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney “ABG” or “CG”.

1611.2.8 Conduit Grounding Bushings

1. Provide NRTL-listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150 C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

2. Manufacturers: O-Z/Gedney Type “BLG” .

1611.2.9 Exothermic Weld Grounding Connections

1. Provide molds and welding material for making exothermic weld connections.

2. In interior locations and in vaults, use low smoke emission type welding material.


3. Match mold and weld material to material types, shapes and sizes to be joined.

4. Manufacturer: ERICO Cadweld.

1611.2.10 Compression Grounding Connections

1. Provide wrought copper connectors, terminals, taps, and splices for making irreversible compression grounding connections.

2. Furnish NRTL-listed grounding connectors that are suitable for direct burial and have been tested successfully according to the requirements of IEEE Std. 837 IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.

3. Provide connector manufacturer’s hydraulic compression tools and dies that match the connectors.

4. Match connector and die size to material shapes and conductor sizes to be joined.

5. Use two-hole heavy-duty compression lugs for bolted connections to ground bars, ground plates, and equipment ground pads.

6. Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground”.

1611.3 EXECUTION

1611.3.1 Examination

1. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage grounding and bonding material has been completed.

2. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

3. Electrode locations and grounding cable routing shown on Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned.

a. Install electrodes and route cable as required meeting project conditions.

b. Where electrode location or cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact locations, routing, and lengths required to meet project conditions.

1611.3.2 Preparation

1. Examine equipment and building finishes that are to receive grounding and bonding material for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1611.3.3 Existing Work

1. Provide bonding jumpers to existing structural rebar and building GEC’s required for complete grounding system..

1611.3.4 General

1. Comply with the requirements of the NEC, this Section and the Drawings.


2. Install grounding and bonding material according to manufacturer's instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

3. Do not use the grounding systems specified in this section for lightning protection grounding.

4. Use the following connection methods unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings:

a. Use exothermic weld grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of dissimilar materials.

b. Use exothermic weld or compression grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of like materials.

c. Use exothermic weld, compression, or bolted grounding connections for accessible connections.

d. Make bolted connections using bolts, nuts, flat washers, and toothed lock washers suitable for the connector and the installation environment; acceptable materials include high strength silicon bronze and 18-8 alloy stainless steel.

e. Make irreversible bolted connections using 18-8 alloy stainless steel tamper-resistant bolts and tamper-resistant nuts along with flat washers, and toothed lock washers. Tamper-resistant nuts and bolts must resist loosening with common tools; acceptable tamper-resistant fasteners include penta-head, break-away, and oval designs.

5. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. Use a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Follow connector manufacturer’s installation instructions and use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed.

7. Install exothermic welds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

8. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

a. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.


b. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

c. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps.

d. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.

e. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

1611.3.5 Main Grounding Electrode System

1. Provide bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps and appurtenances required for complete grounding system to bond equipment and raceways to equipment grounding conductors.

2. Concrete Encased Electrode: Where available, use the building concrete grade beam or strip footing to make a concrete encased main grounding electrode; use either copper ground cable or reinforcing steel as follows:

a. Install a continuous ground cable in the bottom one-third of the grade slab in both the Electrical Room and Pump Room. Use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, not smaller than the grounding electrode cable required by the NEC, and not smaller than 4 AWG. Space cable from the bottom and sides of the grade beam so it has at least 2 inches of concrete coverage.

b. Make one or more reinforcing bars located in the bottom one-third of the slab, electrically continuous thru the entire slab. Use galvanized or uncoated reinforcing bars not smaller than the following sizes based on the total length of the interconnected and paralleled reinforcing bars:

Total length of reinforcing bars: Minimum reinforcing bar size:

112 ft 1-3/8” (#11 bar)

150 ft 1” (#8 bar)

192 ft 3/4” (#6 bar)

223 ft 5/8” (#5 bar)

268 ft 1/2” (#4 bar)

Bond the reinforcing bars together using bare copper ground cable jumpers that are either exothermically welded to the reinforcing bars or connected using hydraulically compressed tap connectors. Use jumpers compatible with the tap fitting that are not smaller than the grounding electrode cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.

3. Main Ground Electrode Ground Bar:

a. Install a main electrode ground bar in an accessible location in the Electrical room adjacent to the Distribution Switchboard.


b. Make an irreversible connection between the main electrode ground bar and the main grounding electrode conductor; use exothermic weld connection or compression grounding lug with tamper-resistant fasteners.

c. Main ground electrode ground bar extensions may be established at additional locations by installing ground bars or ground plates connected to the main electrode ground bar using 4/0 AWG insulated ground conductor with an irreversible connection to each ground bar.

d. Connections to the main ground electrode ground bar will be considered as connections directly to the main ground electrode.

4. Bond exterior underground metal fire protection and potable water service pipes to the main ground electrode bar; use pipe grounding fittings and ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG. Make bond to each water pipe at an accessible location within 5 ft of where it enters the structure. Comply with NEC requirements for bonding around water meters and insulating joints.

5. Bond the nearest building perimeter structural steel column or effectively grounded metal structure to the main ground electrode ground bar; use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.

6. Bond each interior metal piping system to the main ground electrode bar; use pipe grounding fittings and ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG. Make bond to each pipe at an accessible location.

7. Label each conductor connected to the main ground electrode ground bar or main ground electrode ground bar extensions.

1611.3.6 Circuit and System Grounding

1. Connect the service entrance equipment ground bus to the main electrode ground bar; use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.

2. Make no neutral-to-ground connections in the Distribution Switchboard or at any other point in the Electrical Room or Pump Room Distribution Equipment unless as stipulated in these specifications.

3. Separately Derived Systems:

a. Connect ground bus of first disconnecting means for separately derived systems (e.g. dry type transformers, power distribution units, generators, and uninterruptible power supplies) in the vicinity of the main electrical equipment room to the main electrode ground bar; use grounding conductor sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NEC.


b. Connect ground bus of first disconnecting means for separately derived systems that are remote from the main electrical room to the nearest effectively grounded building structural steel column and the nearest effectively grounded metal water pipe; use grounding conductor sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NEC. Make connections at accessible locations.

c. Connect ground bus of first disconnecting means for separately derived systems that are remote from the main electrical room to an extension of the main electrode ground bar if there is neither a nearby effectively grounded building structural steel column nor an effectively grounded metal water pipe; use grounding conductor sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NEC.

d. At the first system overcurrent device or disconnecting means, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper sized as required by the NEC; do not use a bonding screw for this purpose. Make no other neutral-to-ground connections on the load side of the separately derived system disconnect.

1611.3.7 Enclosure and Equipment Grounding

1. Provide permanent and effective equipment, enclosure, and raceway grounding in accordance with NEC requirements and as further specified or shown on the Drawings.

2. Provide an equipment ground bar, separate from any neutral bar, in all switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment and raceway ground conductors. Make connections to the ground bar using mechanical lugs or compression lugs.

3. Make connections and couplings on metallic conduit systems wrench tight.

4. Bonding Bushings:

a. Install bonding bushings on metallic conduit containing circuits rated 100 amperes and higher.

b. Install bonding bushings on metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric or oversize knockouts.

c. Install bonding bushings on metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

d. Bond conduit bonding bushing lug to the equipment ground bar or ground lug in switchgear, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. Size bonding jumpers in accordance with the NEC.

5. Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and branch circuit.


a. Install the grounding conductor within the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors and connect to the grounding terminal or grounding bus in each box or cabinet.

b. Size equipment ground conductor in accordance with the NEC or as shown on the Drawings.

6. In each 15 or 20 ampere branch circuit outlet box and junction box, install a green colored washer head grounding screw with a 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor pigtail.

7. Connect receptacle grounding terminals to the equipment ground system using minimum 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Do not use a "self-grounding" receptacle strap as the only equipment grounding path.

8. Bond raceways served from cable tray using conduit clamps or grounding bushings that are NRTL approved for the purpose.

9. Install an equipment grounding conductor in each cable tray; size conductor per the NEC, but not smaller than 6 AWG. Bond grounding conductor to each cable tray section using UL Listed cable tray ground clamps. Connect grounding conductor to ground bus of each enclosure or equipment item served by the cable tray.

10. Provide busways with a separate, internal equipment ground bus bar. Install separate insulated equipment ground conductor from the ground bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to the equipment ground bar terminal on busway. Size conductor in accordance with the NEC.

1611.3.8 Isolated Ground System – N/A

1611.3.9 Underground Ductbank System Grounding – N/A

1611.3.10 Signal Reference Grid – N/A\

1611.3.11 Static Electricity Grounding and Bonding – N/A

1611.3.12 Field Quality Control

1611.3.12.1 General: Perform on-site verification, certification and acceptance testing of the grounding installation during construction. Verification and testing will be witnessed by engineer.

1611.3.12.2 Before work is concealed verify and certify that the following grounding installations have been made correctly:

1. The building grounding electrode system. This includes the bonding of the foundation reinforcing bars, bonding of the structural steel columns, and bonding of other metallic systems and other grounding electrode systems.

2. Ground plates and grounding bars.

3. All other underground grounding installations.

1611.3.12.3 Acceptance Testing: Perform acceptance testing and submit written reports to Engineer in accordance with the requirements of. Tests will be witnessed by engineer.


1. Test equipment ground resistances for the following items. Measure resistance between the equipment item and the Main Ground Electrode Ground Bar. Use the "two-point method" of IEEE Std. 81. Investigate and correct equipment ground resistances that exceed 0.5 ohm.

a. Trans formers

b. Switchgear and Switchboards

c. Panelboards

d. Generators

e. Motor Control Centers

f. Motors larger than 1 HP

g. UPS Systems

END OF SECTION


Adobe Power LLC


LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WIRE AND CABLE

1612.1 GENERAL


1. Building wire (600 V)

2. Metal-clad cable (600 V)

3. Wire and cable connectors

4. Insulating tape and tubing

5. Wire pulling lubricant

1612.1.2 References

1. NEC 2008

2. IEEE

3. ISA

4. NFPA

1612.1.3 Drawings

1. The drawings, which constitute a part of these specifications, indicate the general layout of wire and cable to be used in this contract. Data presented on these drawings are as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. Accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification, of all dimensions, routing, etc., is directed.

2. Specifications and drawings are schematic in nature. Exact routing, locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor is directed to make field surveys as part of his work prior to submitting product data.

1612.1.4 Quality Assurance

1. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) for components and installation.

2. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

1612.1.5 Submittals

Submit the following:

1. Catalog Data: Compression connectors; indicate installation tools and dies that will be used.


2. Product Data:

a. Manufacturer’s data

b. Submit Manufacturer’s suggested megger levels for new cable

3. Record Drawings

a. The Contractor shall update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact wire numbers and destination points for all wires including spares.

4. Field Test Records:

a. Cable Pulling records required in Building Wire Installation.


1. Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.

1612.2 PRODUCTS


1. Engineer – Approved equal.

1612.2.2 Building Wire

1612.2.2.1 Provide NRTL-listed building wire as shown on the Drawings with the following characteristics:

1. Description: Single conductor 600 V insulated wire.

2. Conductor:

a. 98% conductivity, annealed, uncoated copper, ASTM B 3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire, solid or stranded as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

3. Insulation: The following types, rated 600 volts:

a. 1 AWG and smaller, Type THHN/THWN-2 per UL Standard 83, “Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.”

1612.2.2.2 Color code conductors as follows:

1. Use colored insulation for color coding conductors 6 AWG and smaller.

2. Use water and oil resistant colored plastic adhesive tape, 3/4 inch minimum width, for color coding conductor 4 AWG and larger. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 35"

3. Provide black conductor insulation where colored tape is used for color coding.


4. Use the following color codes for AC power system conductors:

System Voltage:

Conductor:

480Y/277V

208Y/120V

208Y/120V Isolated Ground

120/240V

Phase A: Brown Black Black Black Phase B: Orange Red Red Red Phase C: Yellow Blue Blue --- Grounded (Neutral):

Gray White White White/Red*

White White/Blue

* Equipment Grounding:

Green Green Green Green

Isolated Ground:

--- --- Green/Yellow

---

Switched: Purple Pink --- Blue * Provide grounded conductor insulation with colored stripe when installed in any raceway, box, or enclosure with wiring of another system voltage.

5. Use the following color codes for DC power system conductors:

Positive: Red

Negative: Black

6. In existing facilities, change color coding of existing service, feeder, and major branch circuits (50 amps and larger) to match the above color code.

7. Provide color code for control conductors as indicated on equipment or control system manufacturer’s drawings.

1612.2.3 Tray Cable

1. U.L. Listed for use in cable trays.

2. Single Conductor cables only permitted for 1/0 AWG and larger.

1612.2.4 Shielded Instrumentation Cable

1. Minimum 16 AWG twisted pair.

2. Stranded, tinned, copper conductors.

3. Polyethylene insulated

4. Foil aluminum-polyester shield.

5. Minimum 18 AWG, stranded, tinned, copper drain wire.

6. PVC jacket

7. Meeting the UL recognized component standard 2106

8. 600-volt insulation level


1612.2.5 Multiconductor Cable

1. 600-volt insulation level

2. Minimum 14 AWG stranded copper conductors.

a. THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation

3. Overall PVC jacket

4. Cable shall be identified by either ICEA color coding or ink imprinting.

5. Where cable is not routed in conduit with a separate ground conductor, one conductor in the cable shall be used as a ground conductor.

1612.2.6 Armored Cable

1. Continuously, corrugated aluminum armor.

2. Overall PVC jacket

3. For multi-conductor cable, a separate ground conductor shall be included in the cable.

a. The cable armor is not acceptable as a ground conductor.

1612.2.7 Wiring Connectors

1. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 20 to 12 AWG solid and 16 to 14 AWG stranded, use push-on, insulated, spring type connectors, rated 600 V and 105 ºC that are NRTL-listed to UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors and provide a means of visual inspection of the connection. Manufacturer: IDEAL “In-Sure.”

2. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 8 AWG and smaller, use insulated, spring type connectors, rated 600 volts and 105 ºC that are NRTL-listed to UL 486C, Splicing Wire Connectors. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotchlok.”

3. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 6 AWG through 1 AWG, use the following materials:

a. Tin-plated copper split-bolt connectors that meet the requirements in UL 486A-486B, Wire Connectors; provide with matching 600-volt snap-on insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy “Type KSA” with “Type SC” insulating cover.

b. Multi-tap connectors that meet the requirements of UL 486A-466B that have two or more range-taking mechanical lugs and matching 600-volt insulated cover. Manufacturers: Burndy ‘POLYTAP” or “UNITAP”, Ilsco “Type PCT”, Blackburn “AMT”.

4. For copper wire, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger, use UL 486A-486B listed circumferential or hexagonal crimp compression terminals, splices, or adapters.

a. Provide compression terminals and splices made from electro-tin plated seamless copper tubing and marked with wire size, die index / color code, and number / locations of crimps. Manufacturers: FCI Burndy Types “YA”, “YA-L”, “YA-L-NT”, “YS”, and “YC-C.” Thomas & Betts “Color-Keyed.”


b. Provide straight and offset compression adapters made from electro-tin plated aluminum, NRTL listed for use on copper conductors, and marked with wire size, die index / color code, and number / locations of crimps. Each adapter shall include a 600 V, 90 degree C rated insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy Types “AYP” and “AYPO.”

c. Range-taking, die-less, or indenter-applied terminals are not acceptable.

5. For control wiring use nylon insulated crimp-on terminals with insulation grip that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotchlok MNG,” Thomas & Betts “Sta-Kon.”

a. Use ring tongue terminals for nutted studs.

b. Use flanged fork terminals for barrier terminal blocks.

c. Use pin terminals or ferrules for DIN type terminal blocks.

6. Insulation-piercing type connectors are not acceptable for power or control wiring.

1612.2.8 Insulating Tape and Tubing

1. For making re-enterable tape-insulated splices and connections, provide varnished cambric electrical insulating tape made of cotton cambric fabric that is oil primed and coated with electrical insulating varnish. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 2510” (no adhesive) and Scotch 2520” (pressure-sensitive adhesive).

2. Insulate taped splices and connections using ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape and is rated for 90 ºC continuous operation and 130 ºC short-term overload service. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 130C”

3. For the outer covering of tape-insulated splices and connections use vinyl plastic tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape and has the following characteristics:

a. 8.5 mil minimum thickness,

b. ASTM D-3005, “Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape – Type 1.”

c. Rated 600 volts and 105 ºC, suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

d. Retains flexibility, adhesion, and applicable at temperature ranges from 0 through 100 ºF without loss of physical or electrical properties.

e. Resistant to abrasion, moisture, alkalis, acid, corrosion, and sunlight.

f. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch Super 88”


4. Provide heat shrinkable tubing that meets the requirements of UL 486D – Sealed Wire Connector Systems and has the following characteristics:

a. Rated 600 volts

b. Factory applied adhesive/sealant

c. Split resistant

d. Manufacturer: 3M “ITCSN”

5. Use motor lead splicing kits to insulate and seal connections to leads for motors rated 480V and less. Manufacturer: 3M “5300 Series”

1612.2.9 Wire Pulling Lubricant

1. Provide NRTL-listed wire pulling lubricant that is compatible with the conductor insulation or jacket, has a maximum coefficient of dynamic friction of 0.25, and leaves no flammable residue. For cold weather installations, provide wire pulling lubricant suitable for conduit temperature.

2. Compatibility with conductor insulation shall be determined in accordance with IEEE Std 1210, Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling Lubricants with Wire and Cable.

3. Manufacturer:

a. For conduit temperature above freezing: Polywater “Lubricant J.”

b. For conduit temperature below freezing: Polywater “Lubricant WJ.”

1612.2.10 Aluminum Building Wire

1. Aluminum Building Wire shall not be accepted.

1612.3 EXECUTION


1. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.

2. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage wire and cable is completed.

3. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.

4. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

5. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

a. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions.

b. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required to meet Project conditions.


1. Examine raceways and building finishes that are to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


2. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

3. Do not handle or pull cables that are colder than +14 degrees F. Store cold cables for at least 24 hours in a heated building prior to installation.

1612.3.3 Building Wire Installation

1612.3.3.1 Install building wire according to, the NEC, the requirements in this Section, and the following NECA installation standards as applicable:

1. NECA 1 Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction (ANSI).

2. NECA/AA 104 Recommended Practice for Installing Aluminum Building Wire and Cable (ANSI).

1612.3.3.2 Do not damage conductor, insulation, or jacket by excessive installation pulling tension or sidewall bearing pressure.

1. Calculate expected cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressures for each set of conductors being pulled into a conduit run where any of the following combinations of bends and raceway length is exceeded between accessible pull points:

a. 4 equivalent 90-degree bends and 10 feet of raceway.

b. 3 equivalent 90-degree bends and 40 feet of raceway.

c. 2 equivalent 90-degree bends and 80 feet of raceway.

d. 1 equivalent 90-degree bend and 150 feet of raceway.

e. Straight pull with more than 250 feet of raceway.

2. For cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure calculations use formulas and factors described in IEEE Std 422, IEEE Guide for the Design and Installation of Cable Systems in Power Generating Stations.

3. Obtain recommended maximum conductor or cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure values from the manufacturer, or use the following maximum allowable values:

a. Maximum sidewall bearing pressure: 500 lb/ft.

b. Maximum tension, pulling directly on conductor: 0.008 lb/cmil

c. Maximum tension, pulling on basket grip over insulation jacket: 2000 lb, not to exceed 0.008 lb/cmil of conductor.

4. Use a tension measuring device to monitor pulling force on runs where cable pulling calculations indicate installation stresses may exceed 80 percent of allowable pulling tension or sidewall bearing pressure.

a. Record the maximum measured pulling tension for each monitored cable pull.

b. Submit the recorded cable pulling tension for each monitored cable pull and the corresponding calculated allowable pulling tension.

5. Use a tension measuring device to monitor pulling force on each pull of conductors for critical systems where a pulling winch is used. Record and submit the maximum measured pulling tension for each cable pull.


1612.3.3.3 Use stranded conductors for all power circuits.

1612.3.3.4 Solid conductors shall not be acceptable.

1612.3.3.5 Use copper conductors not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting branch circuits.

1612.3.3.6 Use stranded copper conductors not smaller than 14 AWG for 120V control circuits.

1612.3.3.7 Use minimum 10 AWG copper conductors from panelboard to first outlet for 20-ampere, 120-volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet; use larger conductors as indicated on the Drawings.

1612.3.3.8 Use minimum 10 AWG copper conductors from panelboard to first outlet for 20-ampere, 277-volt branch circuits longer than 150 feet; use larger conductors as indicated on the Drawings.

1612.3.3.9 Do not “through-pull” conductors at boxes, fittings or cabinets where a change of raceway alignment occurs.

1612.3.3.10 Install wiring at outlets with at least 6 inches of slack conductor at each outlet.

1612.3.3.11 Multi-wire branch circuits shall not be used.

1612.3.3.12 Install instrumentation cables in separate raceway systems than power (120V and greater) cables.

1. In Cable Tray systems, provide section barrier between power and instrumentation cables.

1612.3.3.13 All instrumentation and control cables shall be continuous with no splices.

1612.3.4 Connector Installation

1. Install conductors in terminals, splices, adapters, and connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise above the conductor temperature.

3. Do not nick conductors when removing insulation.

4. Do not cut conductor strands to fit into connectors, splices, adapters, or terminals.

5. Make connections using clean connection surfaces. Wire brush conductors immediately before installing lugs, terminals, splices, or adapters.

6. Connect conductors 1/0 AWG and larger using compression terminals at the locations described below where there is adequate wire bending space to accommodate compression terminals. Select compression terminals suitable for the conductor sizes, materials, and termination point configurations. Install compression terminals using the manufacturer’s recommended dies and minimum 12-ton force compression tools.


a. Circuit breakers with frame size greater than 100 amperes that are NRTL listed for with compression terminals. Use compression adapters where the circuit breaker is not listed for compression terminals.

b. Safety switches and fused switches rated more than 100 amperes.

c. Switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, busway, motor control centers, and similar service and distribution equipment.

d. Utilization equipment connections that are NRTL listed for with compression terminals.

7. Install copper conductors, 1/0 AWG and larger, connected using mechanical lugs, in the locations or conditions described below.

a. Connection points not NRTL-listed for either compression terminals or compression adapters.

b. Where there is insufficient wire bending space to accommodate either compression terminals or compression adapters.

c. 100 ampere frame circuit breakers.

d. 30, 60, and 100 ampere safety switches.

8. Terminate power conductors smaller than 1/0 AWG using mechanical lugs.

9. Terminate control conductors using crimp-on terminals or ferrules. Do not place stranded conductors directly under terminal screws. Install terminals or ferrules on conductors using ratchet-type compression tools.

10. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A-486B.

1612.3.5 Insulating Tape and Tubing Installation

1. Install insulating tape and tubing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

2. Insulate splices and taps of irregular shapes with manufactured insulating covers or insulating tape built up to not less than 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

a. Apply varnished cambric tape over connections where re-entry is likely, such as motor lead connections.

b. Use rubber insulating tape in half-lapped layers to develop the basic insulation over splices and taps.

c. Use vinyl plastic tape in half-lapped layers to provide the outer protective covering over splices and taps.


3. Insulate cylinder shaped splices and taps, connector barrels and adapter barrels using heat shrinkable insulating tubing, insulating covers manufactured for the connector, or tape insulation as described above.

1612.3.6 Identification

1612.3.6.1 The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that each and every field wire has a unique wire number associated with it for the entire system.

1. Wire numbers shall correspond to the wire numbers on the control drawings, or panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting.

2. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they are attached in the control panel.

3. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire number assigned.

1612.3.6.2 Multiconductor cable shall be assigned a number which shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and at stub-up locations beneath free-standing equipment. All individual control conductors and instrumentation cable shall be identified at pull points as described above.

1. Armored multiconductor cable shall be labeled using the conduit number shown on the plans.

1612.3.6.3 The following wiring numbering scheme shall be followed throughout the project and used for field wire numbers between Panelboards, Switchboards, Motor Starters, PLC’s, Instruments, Pumps, etc.:

OR

Where:

ORIGIN LOC.=Designation for originating panel or device

ORIGIN TERM.=Terminal designation at originating panel or device

DEST. LOC.=Designation for destination panel or device

DEST. TERM.=Terminal designation at destination panel or device OR

DEST. TERM. = PLC I/O address at destination panel

1. Equipment and field instruments are always identified as the origin.

2. PCMs are always identified as the destination

3. Location is the panel designation for VCP, LCP or PCM. For connections to MCCs, location is the specific starter tag and loop

(ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.)/(DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.)

(ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.)(DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.)


number. Location is the tag and loop number for motor starters, field instruments and equipment. Any hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number shall be omitted

4. Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For multi-conductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by commas

5. Terminal designations at motor leads shall be the motor manufacturer’s standard terminal designation (T1, T2, T3, etc.)

6. Terminal designations at PCMs where the field conductor connects to a PLC input or output shall be the PLC address (Note: the following PLC I/O numbering scheme is typical for Allen Bradley, the numbering scheme should be modified to match that of the actual PLC manufacturer used for the project).

a. W:X:Y/Z for a discrete point or W:X:Y.Z for an analog point.

W = I for input, O for Output.

X = PLC number (1,2,3...).

Y = Slot number (01, 02, 03... ).

Z = Terminal number (00, 01, 02...) for a discrete point.

Z = Word Number (1,2,3...) for an analog point.)

b. Examples of discrete points: I:1:01/01, O:2:10/07

c. Examples of analog points: I:1:01.2, O:2:02.3

7. Terminal designations at PCMs where the conductor does not connect to a PLC I/O point shall be the terminal number with a “C” prefix (C0010). For common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch the subsequent points will have an A, B, C, ... etc suffix (C0010A).

8. All spare conductors shall be terminated on terminal blocks and shall be identified as required for other field wires, with an “SPR” prefix.

1612.3.6.4 Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.

1612.3.6.5 Apply color coding tape on conductors at each termination, splice, junction, and pull box.

1612.3.6.6 Post conductor color code on each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear assembly, motor control center, dry-type transformer, safety switch, and separate motor controller. Use type-written, adhesive-backed labels


1612.3.7.1 Observe conductors and cables during the installation process.

1. Reject and replace entire reels, rolls, or boxes containing conductors or cables with material or manufacturing defects.

2. Reject and replace cable or conductor segments that have been kinked, dented, or otherwise damaged during handling or installation.


1612.3.7.2 After installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuit is energized, show product capability and compliance with requirements and verify by documented inspections and tests.

1612.3.7.3 Perform the following inspections:

1. Inspect conductors and cables for:

a. Freedom from material defect or physical damage,

b. Correct conductor size, material, and insulation type,

c. Correct color coding and identification.

2. Inspect connections for:

a. Correct connector size and type according to the Specifications,

b. The use of the correct compression dies and the correct number of crimps on compression connectors in accordance with the connector manufacturer’s instructions.

1612.3.7.4 Perform the following tests:

1. Before connecting conductors to equipment, use a megohm meter in a 1-minute test to verify the insulation integrity of each service conductor, feeder conductor, critical system branch circuit conductor, and critical system control conductor with respect to ground and other conductors in the same raceway.

a. Use 1000-volts dc to test conductors rated 600 volts.

b. Conductors with insulation resistances over 50 megohms are acceptable.

c. Conductors with insulation resistances less than 2 megohms are defective.

d. If the conductor insulation resistance is between 50 megohms and 2 megohms notify the - - - - Subcontract Technical Representative and investigate the conductor installation.

2. After connecting conductors to equipment, test continuity and correct connection of each power circuit conductor and each control circuit conductor.

3. Measure and record the tightness of not less than 10% of each size and type of mechanical or bolted connection using a calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver.

a. Compare measured torque with torque recommended by the connector manufacturer or UL Standard 486A-486B.

1612.3.7.5 Remove and replace defective, incorrect, or improperly installed conductors and connectors. Re-inspect and re-test replacement conductors and connectors.

1612.3.7.6 Submit test and inspection records to the Engineering representative.

END OF SECTION


Adobe Power LLC


CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1613.1 GENERAL


1. Conduits and fittings

2. Outlet boxes

3. Pull and junction boxes

4. Floor boxes

5. Surface metal raceways

6. Wireway

1613.1.2 References

1613.1.2.1 American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated

2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated

3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit

4. ANSI C80.6 - Intermediate Metal Conduit - Zinc Coated

1613.1.2.2 National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

1. NEMA RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit

2. NEMA TC2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit

3. NEMA TC3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

4. NEMA TC13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing

1613.1.2.3 Federal Specifications

1. A-A-55810 - Conduit, Metal, Flexible

2. W-C-1094 - Conduit and Conduit Fittings; Plastic, Rigid

3. WW-C-540 - Conduit, Metal, Rigid: Coupling, Elbow & Nipple, Electrical

1613.1.2.4 Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 1 - Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit

2. UL 6 - Standard for Safety for Rigid Metal Conduit

3. UL 360 - Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

4. UL 651 - Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

5. UL 797 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Metallic Tubing


6. UL 1242 - Standard for Safety for Intermediate Metal Conduit

7. UL 1660 - Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

8. UL 1653 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing

1613.1.3 Drawings

1613.1.3.1 The drawings, which constitute a part of these specifications, indicate the general layout of conduit to be used in this contract. Data presented on these drawings are as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. Accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification, of all dimensions, routing, etc., is directed.

1613.1.3.2 Specifications and drawings are schematic in nature. Exact routing, locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor is directed to make field surveys as part of his work prior to submitting conduit layout drawings.

1613.1.4 Submittals

1613.1.4.1 Submit the following:

1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing floor boxes. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

2. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing surface metal raceway. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

3. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing wireway. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.


1613.1.5.1 Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) for components and installation.

1613.1.5.2 Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.


Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1 – Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.

1613.2 PRODUCTS


Alternate products may be accepted – Engineer approved equal.

1613.2.2 Coatings

Provide products with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic that is suitable for the environment in which the product will be installed and used.


1613.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit and Fittings (IMC)

1. Furnish intermediate metal conduit (IMC) that conforms to UL1242 – Intermediate Metal Conduit, ANSI C80.6 – Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC).

2. Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies that meet the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.

1613.2.4 Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings (RMC)

1. Furnish rigid metal conduit (RMC) that meets the requirements of UL6 – Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit, NEMA C80.1 – Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC).

2. Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies that meet the requirements of UL514B and ANSI/NEMA FB1.

1613.2.5 Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings

1. Furnish PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, RMC or IMC that meets the requirements of NEMA RN 1 – PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.

2. Use factory-fabricated elbows.

3. Furnish 40 mils PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies meeting the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes and NEMA RN 1 PVC.

1613.2.6 Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit and Fittings (RNC)

1. Furnish rigid non-metallic conduit (RNC) that conforms to UL651 – Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit, NEMA TC 2 – Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit.

2. Furnish non-metallic, solvent-welded socket fittings that meet the requirements of UL514C – Non-Metallic Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and NEMA TC 3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1613.2.7 Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings (EMT)

1. Furnish galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) that conforms to UL797 – Electrical Metallic Tubing, NEMA C80.3 – Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).

2. Furnish compression or set-screw type fittings that meet the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

1613.2.8 Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings

1. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL1 – Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit.


2. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron fittings that meet the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

1613.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings

1. Furnish liquid-tight flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL360 – Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical.

2. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron or zinc-plated steel liquid-tight fittings that meet the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

1613.2.10 Insulating Bushings

1. Provide NRTL listed insulating bushings with 105 ºC rated insulation.

2. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type IB.

1613.2.11 Ground Bushings

1. Provide NRTL listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150 ºC rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

2. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG.

1613.2.12 Expansion Fittings

1. Furnish NRTL listed expansion fittings with hot dipped galvanized malleable iron body, factory installed packing and a bonding jumper.

2. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type AX, TX or EXE with Type BJ bonding jumper.

1613.2.13 Sealing Fittings

1. Furnish zinc-plated, malleable iron sealing fittings that meet the requirements of UL886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous Locations.

2. Select each sealing fitting so the cross-sectional area of conductors passing through the seal is not more than 25 percent of the cross-sectional area of a rigid metal conduit of the same trade size unless the fitting is specifically identified for a higher percentage of fill.

3. Provide sealing compound specifically listed for use with the sealing fitting.

4. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds Type EYS, EYSX, EYD.

1613.2.14 Corrosion Protection Tape

1. Furnish pressure-sensitive, 10 mil thick. PVC based tape for corrosion protection of metal conduit and fittings.

2. Manufacturer: 3M, Type 50.


1613.2.15 Raceway Measuring Tape

1. Furnish raceway measuring tape with permanently printed measurements in one-foot increments and minimum 1200 lb average breaking strength.

2. Manufacturer: Greenlee “39243”.

1613.2.16 Surface Metal Raceway – N/A

1. “Wiremold” type products will not be accepted.

1613.2.17 Wireway

1. Provide NRTL listed, oiltight and dust-tight type wireway with covers, elbows, tees, hangers, and fittings required for a complete system.

2. Supply wireway without knockouts.

3. Provide 45 degree angle and tee fittings to accommodate bending radii for fiber optic cables.

4. Manufacturer: Square D “Square-Duct”.

1613.2.18 Outlet Boxes

1. Provide outlet boxes selected for specific installations using the guidance in NEMA OS 3, Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes, and the requirements of this Section.

2. For dry locations provide galvanized steel outlet boxes that comply with UL Standard 514-A – Metallic Outlet Boxes and ANSI/NEMA OS1 – Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.

a. For luminaire outlets use 4 inch x 1-1/2 inch deep octagonal boxes with fixture stud attachment as required to support luminaires.

b. For flush outlets in stud walls or above-grade cast-in-place concrete walls use 4 inch square x 1-1/2 inch deep boxes; provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide raised device covers that match the thickness of the wallboard and the number of devices. Provide supplemental box supports to prevent movement of the box.

c. For flush outlets in above-grade masonry walls use masonry boxes with conduit knockouts. Provide boxes with depth suitable for the masonry unit size. Provide multiple gang boxes as required by the number of devices.

d. For surface outlet boxes in EMT raceway systems, use 4 inch x 2-1/8 inch deep square boxes. Provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide square surface covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

3. For damp or wet locations and for surface-mounted RMC or IMC raceway systems, provide outlet boxes that comply with UL Standard 498 and 514, ANSI/NEMA FB1.


a. For lighting fixture outlets use 4 inch x 2-1/16 inch deep round cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs.

b. For flush or surface wall-mounted outlets, use 4-11/16 square, 2-11/16 inch deep cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs. Provide multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

1613.2.19 Recessed Floor Boxes – N/A

1613.2.20 Multi-Service Recessed Floor Boxes – N/A

1613.2.21 Pull and Junction Boxes

1. All general interior pull and junction boxes to be NEMA TYPE 12 minimum except as directed in these specifications.

2. All general exterior pull and junction boxes to be NEMA TYPE 4 minimum except as directed in these specifications.

3. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs up to 3/4 inch trade size, provide 4-11/16 inches square, 2-11/16 inches deep cast malleable iron pull and junction boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers.

4. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations that are subject to hose-directed water, provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4.

5. For damp or wet, corrosive locations provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4X.

6. For locations subject to occasional submersion provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 6.

7. For in-ground flush-mounted cast metal boxes provide UL 50 Type 6 boxes with flanged, recessed cover.

a. Material: Galvanized cast iron or galvanized malleable iron.

b. Cover: Non-skid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.

c. Identification: Permanent mark or logo on cover prominently identifying the function of the enclosure in accordance with NEC requirements.

8. For in-ground, non-metallic, open-bottom handholes provide products that are NRTL-listed to ANSI/SCTE 77 – Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity.

a. Material: Polymer concrete.

b. Minimum ANSI/SCTE 77 load rating:

Located in sidewalks: Tier 8.

Located in driveways, parking lots, and off-roadway locations: Tier 15.


c. Size: Up to 30” x 48”

d. Cover: Non-skid cover with stainless steel cover bolts.

e. Identification: Permanent mark or logo on cover prominently identifying the function of the enclosure in accordance with NEC requirements.

f. Manufacturer: Quazite “Style PC, PG, or PT”

9. Provide connection points for equipment grounding conductors in each box.

1613.3 EXECUTION

1613.3.1 Existing Work

1. Remove all exposed abandoned raceways, including abandoned raceways above accessible ceiling finishes, to the point that non-removable building construction (e.g. concrete or masonry) covers the raceway. Cut raceways flush with non-removable building construction.

2. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.

3. Cap, plug, or seal remaining raceway openings to restore the original fire rating of floors, walls, and ceilings after electrical demolition. Patch surfaces to match existing.

4. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.

5. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.

6. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.


1. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1613.3.3 General

1. Install complete systems of raceways and boxes for wiring systems.

2. Install raceways and boxes according to NECA 1 – Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction, NECA 101 – Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT), NECA 111 – Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC), the NEC, the manufacturer’s instructions, and requirements in this Section.

3. Raceway termination points and box locations shown on the Drawings are in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Verify locations before rough in.


4. Raceway routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Coordinate routing with structure and with work of other trades. Route as required for a complete wiring system.

5. Ground and bond raceways and boxes as required in Section 16450 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

6. Support raceways and boxes in accordance with the requirements the National Electrical Code.

7. Identify raceways and boxes as required.

8. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

9. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes or raceways.

1613.3.4 Conduit Installation

1613.3.4.1 For low-voltage wiring systems (less than 600 volts) use conduit materials according to the NEC and the following:

1. Outdoors - underground:

a. Direct buried: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped RMC, or tape-wrapped IMC. Do not use RNC where subject to physical damage. Install with 24 inches minimum cover from top of conduit to finished grade or top of paving.

Concrete encased: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC, RMC, or IMC for concrete encased underground work. Install with 24 inches minimum cover from top of encasement to finished grade or paving.

2. Outdoors - exposed: Use RMC or IMC.

3. Outdoor corrosive locations (including cooling towers): Use plastic-coated RMC and fittings.

4. Outdoors - concealed: Use RMC or IMC for concealed outdoor work. Do not use bare RMC or IMC in direct contact with earth. EMT may be used for concealed outdoor work where not in contact with earth, not encased in concrete, and where not exposed to deteriorating agents.

5. Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms or telecommunications rooms:

a. Exposed to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC or IMC.

b. Exposed to moisture: Use RMC or IMC.

c. Exposed to corrosives: Use plastic-coated RMC and fittings.

d. Not exposed to deteriorating agents, and not subject to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC, IMC.

e. NO EMT CONDUIT WILL BE ACCEPTED.

6. Indoors – concealed:

a. Within drywall partitions and above false ceilings: Use RMC, IMC.


b. Within masonry or cast-in-place concrete walls or floors: Use RMC or IMC.

c. Direct-buried under building floor slabs on grade: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped RMC, or tape-wrapped IMC. Locate top of conduits not less than 12 inches below the bottom of the concrete slab. Install warning tape approximately 6 inches above the conduits; install multiple warning tapes above parallel conduit runs wider than 18 inches.

d. Concrete encased under building floor slabs on grade: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC, RMC, or IMC. Locate top of concrete encasement not less than 12 inches below the bottom of the concrete slab. Install warning tape approximately 6 inches above the concrete encasement; install multiple warning tapes above concrete encasements wider than 24 inches.

7. Install flexible conduit sections where raceways cross expansion joints or seismic joints, where they are attached to parts of the structure with a potential for differential seismic displacement, and where they connect to equipment and pump motors with designed anchors (seismic controls) or vibration isolators.

a. For raceway systems from 1/2 through 1-1/4 inches, install a minimum of 2 feet of flexible conduit, maximum length as determined by the NEC.

b. For raceway systems from 1-1/2 through 2 inches, install a minimum of 3 feet of flexible conduit, maximum length as determined by the NEC.

c. For raceway systems larger than 2 inches, install a minimum of 4 feet of flexible conduit, maximum length as determined by the NEC.

d. Arrange the flexible conduit sections to accommodate 4 inches of movement in all directions,

e. Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit outdoors, in wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations, and in mechanical rooms. Use flexible metal conduit in dry indoor locations.

f. Install pull boxes as required to comply with the limits on conduit bends and distance between pull points in the CONDUIT INSTALLATION article of this Section; count each flexible conduit section described in this article as not less than a 90-degree bend.

8. Connection to vibrating equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor driven equipment) - Use a minimum of 24 inches; maximum length as determined by the NEC:

a. Outdoors: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

b. In mechanical rooms: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

c. Wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

d. Dry indoor locations: Use flexible metal conduit.


9. Connections to luminaires: Use 3/8 inch flexible metal conduit or metal-clad cable in 6 foot maximum lengths for tap conductors to luminaires above suspended ceilings.

1613.3.4.2 Use 3/4-inch or larger conduit to enclose multiple conductors larger than 12 AWG.

1613.3.4.3 Conceal conduits, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, with finished walls, floors and ceilings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install concealed conduits with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions.

1613.3.4.4 Position parallel underground conduits with not less than 7-1/2 inches center-to-center separation.

1613.3.4.5 Install expansion fittings where embedded conduits cross building expansion joints.

1613.3.4.6 Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations.

1613.3.4.7 Use sealing locknuts, hubs, or similar water-resistant fittings on conduits entering the top of switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, pull boxes, and similar enclosures that are exposed in structures with automatic fire sprinkler systems.

1613.3.4.8 Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect conductors or cables at conduit terminations.

1613.3.4.9 Install conduits with the following limits of bends and distance between pull points:

1. Less than 50 ft, follow the NEC.

2. 50 ft to 100 ft, a maximum of 3 equivalent 90 degree bends.

3. 100 ft to 150 ft, a maximum of 2 equivalent 90 degree bends.

4. 150 ft to 200 ft, a maximum of with 1 equivalent 90 degree bends.

5. Over 200 ft, a straight run with no bend.

1613.3.4.10 Stub Up Connections:

1. Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with the finished floor or equipment pad.

2. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor.

3. Where equipment connections are not made under this Subcontract, install threaded insert plugs set flush with the floor.

1613.3.4.11 Install conduit sealing fittings according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with NRTL listed conduit sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Where conduits enter or leave NEC Class I hazardous locations.


2. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air conditioned spaces.

3. Where conduits enter or leave radiological "controlled areas.”

4. Where conduits go between areas where air pressure differential must be maintained.

5. Where conduits enter an enclosure protected by a clean agent total flooding fire suppression system.

6. Where otherwise required by the NEC.

1613.3.4.12 Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduits dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

1613.3.4.13 Install plastic-coated RMC and fittings according to the NEC and manufacturer's instructions. Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

1613.3.4.14 Do not use RNC 90 degree elbows larger than 2 inch trade size; use plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped RMC, or tape-wrapped IMC for 2-1/2 inch trade size and larger 90 degree elbows.

1613.3.4.15 Maintain the following minimum clearances between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C):

1. 6 inches at perpendicular crossings.

2. 12 inches between parallel runs.

1613.3.4.16 Avoid moisture traps in conduit system; provide junction boxes with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

1613.3.4.17 Install corrosion protection tape on metal conduits and fittings in contact with soil using half-lapped wrappings.

1613.3.4.18 Install grounding bushings at the following locations:

1. At every entry to enclosures on metallic conduits containing circuits rated 100 amperes and higher.

2. On metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric or oversize knockouts.

3. On metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

1613.3.4.19 Install conduit measuring tape in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the tape. Secure each end of tape.

1613.3.4.20 Use PVC-Coated-Rigid Steel conduit for transition from underground to above-finished-floor.

1613.3.5 Firestopping

1. Install an NRTL approved firestop system at each electrical penetration in a fire-rated wall, floor, or partition.


2. At least 2 days prior to firestopping installation, notify LANL Subcontractor Technical Representative (STR) so that arrangements can be made for inspection during installation. Do not proceed with the firestopping installation unless a LANL inspector is present.

1613.3.6 Rodent Prooing

1. All conduit termination shall be made rodent proof with engineer-approved sealant or another sealing means.

1613.3.7 Outlet Box Installation

1613.3.7.1 Install outlet boxes with centers at the following heights unless noted otherwise on the Drawings:

1. Receptacle, telephone and data outlets:

a. Common Areas: 30 inches above finished floor.

2. Light switches: center 48 inches above finished floor and within 12 inches of door frame.

3. Thermostats: center 48 inches above finished floor.

4. Wall mounted emergency lights: 96 inches above finished floor or 12 inches below the ceiling; whichever is lower.

5. Fire alarm audible/visible alarm devices: center of strobe light 96 inches above finished floor or 6 inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower.

6. Fire alarm pull stations: center 48 inches above finished floor.

1613.3.7.2 Coordinate outlet box locations with modular furniture and associated hangers.

1613.3.7.3 Where the Drawings show outlets as adjacent, align outlet boxes with each other and group them symmetrically.

1613.3.7.4 Install a multi-gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional type boxes.

1613.3.7.5 Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

1613.3.7.6 Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

1613.3.7.7 Support boxes independently of conduit.

1613.3.7.8 Install partitions in boxes as follows:

1. Between 277 volt devices

2. Between 277 volt light switches devices and 120 volt devices.

3. Between either 120 volt or 277 volt devices and low voltage control switches.

1613.3.7.9 Install a blank cover plate on each outlet box in which no device is installed.

1613.3.8 Pull and Junction Box Installation

1. Install pull and junction boxes as shown on the Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, and compliance with regulatory requirements.


2. Install pull boxes as required to comply with limits on conduit bends and distance between pull points in the CONDUIT INSTALLATION article of this Section.

3. Install indoor pull and junction boxes in accessible locations above accessible ceilings and in unfinished spaces. Position boxes so covers can be removed. Place boxes to maintain headroom.

4. Install a concrete collar around handholes not placed in sidewalks or pavement.

1613.3.9 Wireway Installation

1. Install wireways at locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Mount plumb and level.

1613.3.10 Surface Metal Raceway Installation

1. Install surface metal raceway at locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces.

3. Mount plumb and level.

1613.3.11 Adjusting

1. Adjust flush-mounted outlets to make front flush with finished floor, wall, or ceiling material.

2. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.

1613.3.12 Cleaning

1. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.


1. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.

END OF SECTION


Adobe Power LLC


WIRE CONNECTORS AND DEVICES

1615.1 GENERAL

1615.1.1 Summary

Section Includes

1. Receptacles

2. Snap switches

3. Dimmer switches

4. Wall plates

5. Multi-outlet assemblies

6. Occupancy sensing lighting controls

7. Wire connecting devices.

8. Terminations.

9. Splices.

1615.1.2 References

1. NEC 2017

2. IEEE

3. ISA

4. NFPA

1615.1.3 Drawings

1. The drawings, which constitute a part of these specifications, indicate the general layout of devices to be used in this contract. Data presented on these drawings are as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. Accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification, of all dimensions, routing, etc., is directed.

2. Specifications and drawings are schematic in nature. Exact routing, locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor is directed to make field surveys as part of his work prior to submitting product data.

1615.1.4 Submittals

Submit the following:

1. Product Data



1. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC).

2. Furnish products listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.

3. Manufacturers of products addressed in this Section shall maintain an ISO 9001 certification.


1. Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.

1615.2 PRODUCTS


1. Alternate products may be accepted – Engineer approved equal.

1615.2.2 Receptacles

1. Provide back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, straight-blade and locking type, receptacles as indicated on the drawings. Receptacles shall meet the performance and design requirements of Federal Specification WC596 and UL Standard 498, Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. Receptacle configurations shall be in accordance with NEMA WD 6.

2. For 120 volt convenience receptacles connected to general purpose branch circuits provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding duplex receptacles. Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy.

3. For 120 volt receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding duplex receptacles. Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy.

4. For computer or instrument 120 volt circuit receptacles provide straight-blade NEMA 5-15R, 15 amperes, 125 volts, isolated grounding duplex receptacles.

5. For ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding, “feed through” type, self-testing GFCI, duplex receptacle that meet the requirements of UL Standard 943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. Provide units that can be installed in a 2 3/4 inch deep outlet box without an adapter.

6. For ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding, “feed through” type, self-testing GFCI, duplex receptacle that meet the requirements of UL Standard 943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. Provide units that can be installed in a 2 3/4 inch deep outlet box without an adapter.


7. For 120 volts, 20 amp circuit outlets serving electric water coolers (EWC) provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding, and single receptacles. Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy.

8. Provide straight-blade and twist lock receptacles for special applications as indicated on the Drawings.

1615.2.3 Receptacles, Industrial Heavy Duty

1. For NRTL listed equipment furnished with cords and attachment plugs configured to the current edition of NEMA WD 6, provide the corresponding receptacles. Provide receptacles that meet the performance and design requirements of Federal Specification WC596 and UL Standard 498, Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. For equipment not furnished with cords and attachment plugs conforming to NEMA WD 6, provide receptacles and matching plugs as specified below.

2. For 20, 30, 60, and 100 ampere heavy duty receptacle outlets located in dry, damp, or wet locations provide pin and sleeve type receptacles that are color coded and uniquely configured to the particular circuit voltage and current rating.

3. Pin and sleeve receptacles shall be NRTL listed to UL Standard 1682, Plugs, Receptacles, and Cable Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve Type and UL Classified to IEC Standards 309-1 and 309-2, Plugs, Socket Outlets, and Couplers for Industrial Purposes, and Series II rated for voltages and services.

4. Provide a back box suitable for each particular receptacle device and installation location.

5. Where indicated on the Drawings provide 20, 30, 60, and 100 ampere pin and sleeve receptacles with safety interlocks that will prevent making or breaking the receptacle connection under load.

6. For each receptacle provide a matching plug.

7. Manufacturer: Pass & Seymour “IEC 309 Industrial Products”

1615.2.4 Snap Switches

1. Provide single pole, double pole, three-way, four-way and illuminated handle snap switches as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes, 120-277 volts AC, back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, quiet type AC switch with yoke grounding screw. Switches shall meet the performance and design requirements of UL Standard 20, General Use Snap Switches, and Federal Specification WS896.

3. Switches used for lighting control shall have integrated motion sensors and ‘auto-off’ features.


1615.2.5 Wallbox Dimming Controls

1. Provide wallbox mounted dimming control units that meet the requirements of UL 1492, Solid-State Dimming Controls. NRTL listing shall be specific to the type of load to be controlled.

2. Each dimming control shall include a solid-state full-wave dimmer, quiet on off switch, audible noise filter, and electromagnetic noise filter.

3. Dimmer wattage rating shall exceed connected load by 30 percent minimum, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

4. Dimmer control shall provide full-range, continuously adjustable light output. Dimmer control may be by vertical slider, toggle, or rotary knob.

5. Dimmer control shall include voltage compensation to stabilize light output with varying AC line voltage.

6. Dimmer switch shall be a mechanical air-gap switch that opens at the dimmer minimum setting, with single pole or 3 way operation as required to control the lighting in each space.

7. Energized parts shall be behind a screw-secured cover. Removal of a snap-on cover shall not expose any energized parts to finger contact.

8. Provide incandescent lamp dimmers as indicated on the Drawings. Equip dimmers with electromagnetic filter to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference. Manufacturer: Lutron “Nova”

9. Provide fluorescent lamp dimmers for use with electronic ballasts specified in Section 26 5100, Interior Lighting. Manufacturer: Lutron “Nova”

1615.2.6 Wall Plates

1. For flush mounted interior receptacles and wall switches, provide 0.032 inch thick (minimum) brushed 302/304 alloy stainless steel smooth wall plates that meet the requirements of Federal Specification WP-455A. Manufacturer: Hubbell “S” series.

2. For surface mounted interior receptacles and switches, furnish galvanized steel 4 inch square raised surface covers. Receptacles installed in raised covers shall be secured by more than one screw. Manufacturer: RACO “800” series.

3. For GFCI receptacles in damp locations provide weatherproof, cast aluminum, hinged, self-closing device covers. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP26” or “WPFS26”

4. For GFCI receptacles in wet locations provide cast aluminum, hinged, self-closing device covers that are weatherproof whether or not the attachment plug cap is inserted. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP26M” or “WP26MH”

5. Provide single, multi-gang, and combination type wall plates that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices.

6. Use metal plate securing screws to match plate finish.


1615.2.7 Multioutlet Assembly – N/A

1615.2.8 Occupancy Sensing Light Switches

1. For General Area Lighting, provide an NRTL-listed, dual voltage (120 and 277 volts), passive infrared automatic occupancy-sensing wall switch with 180 degree coverage, built-in light level sensor, adjustable time delay, adjustable sensitivity, and a switching technology that is suitable for electronic ballast inrush currents. Device shall have dual manual buttons and dual relays for user-controlled dual-level lighting switching. Light level sensor shall hold off the second relay when adequate daylighting is present in the office. Relay contacts shall be rated for at least 1500 watts ballast load at 277 volts.

1615.2.9 Control Connectors

1615.2.9.1 Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to all screw terminals.

1. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry

2. Deep internal serrations

3. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased insulator -barrel surface area to insure that the insulator remains in contact with the barrel.

4. Electroplated-Tin copper conductor.

1615.2.10 Joints, Splices, Taps, and Connections

1. For 600-volt conductors use solderless connectors.

2. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs. Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper conductors.

3. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been allowed or are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors shall be specifically designed for that purpose.

4. For wire No. 10 AWG and smaller, use Buchanan compression splice caps, number 2006S or 2011S, with insulating caps.

5. For wire No. 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression connectors, manufactured by Burndy or Thomas & Betts, or approved equal.

6. Where waterproof splices are required

a. Suitable for indoor, outdoor, weather exposed, direct buried or submersed applications.

b. Utilizing an epoxy, polyurethane, and re-enterable compounds.

c. For use with shielded or unshielded plastic- and rubber-jacketed, signal, control, and power cables rated up to 1 kV.

d. Two-part mold body with tongue and groove seams and built in spacer webbing.


1615.2.11 Insulating Tape

1615.2.11.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

1. General purpose insulating tape.

a. Min 7 mil vinyl tape.

b. Suitable for application in an ambient of -18C/0F.

c. Operating range up to 105C/220F.

d. Flame retardant, hot- and cold- weather resistant, UV resistant.

e. For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC.

f. Meeting and complying with:

ASTM D-3005 Type I.

UL 510.

CSA C22.2.

g. As manufactured by:

3M - Scotch No. Super 33+.

Or approved equal.

2. General purpose color coding tape.

a. Min 7 mil vinyl tape.

b. Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables.

c. For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures.

d. Shall have the following available colors:

Red.

Yellow.

Blue.

Brown.

Gray.

White.

Green.

Orange.

Violet

e. For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing.

f. Meeting and complying with:

UL 510.

CSA C22.2.

g. As manufactured by:

3M - Scotch No. 35.


Or approved equal.

3. Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape.

a. Min 30-mil, flexible, elastomer tape which expands in fire to form an insulating firewall between flame and cable.

b. Bind in place with glass cloth electrical tape.

c. As manufactured by:

3M - Scotch No. 77.

Or approved equal.

4. Glass cloth electrical tape.

a. 7.4-mil thermosetting silicone adhesive which performs at Class H temperatures 180C/356F.

b. Use for the following applications:

To secure non-PSA insulations such as glass in high-temperature areas.

Splice wire rated at 150C, 180C, 200C.

For binding Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape.

c. Meeting and complying with:

MIL-I-19166C.

UL Recognized Component listing for 200C (Guide OANZ2, File E17385)

CSA Accepted Component 180C File LR93411.

d. As manufactured by:

3M - Scotch No. 69.

Or approved equal.

1615.3 EXECUTION


1. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper locations and heights.

2. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

3. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

4. Clean debris from outlet boxes before installing devices.

1615.3.2 Installation

1. Install products following manufacturer's instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

2. Install devices plumb, level, and secure.


3. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, mount devices flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding point of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches and receptacles under single, multi-gang wall plates.

4. Do not use the duplex/split-wire break-off tabs in receptacles as circuit conductors for connecting downstream devices.

5. Cover devices and assemblies during painting.

6. Install wall plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets after painting is complete.

7. Install receptacle for electric water cooler (EWC) within EWC cabinet as recommended by manufacturer.

8. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.

9. MOTOR CONNECTIONS

a. Terminate wires with compression type ring lugs at motors.

1615.3.3 Dual-Level Lighting Control

1. Provide dual-level lighting control in spaces 100 square feet and larger.

2. Coordinate manual controls with automatic controls so the manual control can reduce the lighting load by at least 50 percent in a reasonably uniform lighting pattern.

3. Coordinate dual-level lighting controls with day lighting apertures, such as windows.

4. Coordinate dual-level-lighting controls with luminaire ballasts specified in Section 26 5100, Interior Lighting System.

1615.3.4 Grounding

1. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

2. Connect isolated ground receptacle grounding terminal to the isolated grounding conductor.

1615.3.5 Identification

1. Identify wiring devices with circuit number as required in Section 26 0553, Identification for Electrical Systems.


1. Inspect each wiring device for defects before installing.

2. Operate each operable device at least six times with circuit energized; verify proper operation.

3. Test 15 and 20 ampere receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity using an NRTL listed test device that impresses a momentary current of at least 15 amperes on the branch circuit conductors and equipment grounding path.


4. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer recommendations.

a. Verify that GFCI will trip at 5 ±1 mA current

b. Verify that GFCI does not trip at less than 1.8 mA current.

5. Replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

1615.3.7 Cleaning and Adjusting

1. Clean devices and wall plates. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices.

2. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3. Adjust time-out controls each occupancy sensing light switches to the following settings:

a. General Lighting: 30seconds.

END OF SECTION


Adobe Power LLC


INTERIOR LIGHTING

1620.1 GENERAL

1620.1.1 Summary

1620.1.1.1 Section Includes

1. Interior luminaries and accessories

2. Lamps

3. Ballasts

1620.1.1.2 Definitions:

1. Luminaire: A luminaire is a complete lighting unit including lamp(s) and parts required to distribute the light, position and protect the lamp(s), and connect the lamp(s) to the power supply.

2. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under specified operating and starting condition.

3. Total harmonic distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the fundamental current.

1620.1.2 References

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

C78.1 Fluorescent Lamps - Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics.

C81.61 Electrical Lamp Bases.

C81.63 Gauges for Electrical Lamp Bases and Lampholders.

C82.11 High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.

2. Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

LM-41 Photometric Testing of Indoor Fluorescent Luminaires

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

LE-4 Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

70 National Electrical Code

5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

935 Lighting Fixtures, Fluorescent.

935 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts, Standard for.


542 Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps.

1620.1.3 Drawings

1. The drawings, which constitute a part of these specifications, indicate the specific fixtures/lamps to be used in this contract. Data presented on these drawings are as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. Accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification, of all dimensions, routing, etc., is directed.

2. Specifications and drawings are schematic in nature. Exact routing, locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor is directed to make field surveys as part of his work prior to submitting lighting layout drawings.

1620.1.4 Submittals

1620.1.4.1 Submit the following in accordance with project submittal procedures:

1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing luminaires, lamps, and ballasts. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. Arrange data for luminaires in the order of fixture designation.

2. Performance Curves/Data:

a. Submit certified photometric data for each type of luminaire.

b. Submit supply-air, return-air, heat-removal, and sound performance data for air handling luminaires.

3. Drawings: Submit shop drawings for non-standard luminaires.

4. Warranty: Submit warranties for luminaires and for electronic ballasts.


1. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the International Building Code (IBC) for components and installation.

2. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.

3. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and ballasts similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service performance.

4. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware and trim with the ceiling system.

1620.1.6 Service Conditions

1. Luminaires, lamps and ballasts shall perform satisfactorily in the following service conditions:

a. Elevation: 6000 feet above sea level.


b. Ambient temperature limits: 32 to 104 degrees F unless indicated otherwise on Design Drawings.

1620.1.7 Extra Materials

1. Furnish the following extra materials matching products installed. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents.

a. Five (5) percent of quantity of fluorescent lamps of each type, but no fewer than two lamps of each type.

b. One (1) percent of quantity of louvers and lenses of each type, but not less than one of each type.

c. One (1) percent of quantity of ballasts of each type, but not less than one of each type.

1620.1.8 Warranty

1. Electronic Ballasts: Submit a warranty, mutually executed by the ballast manufacturer and the installer, agreeing to replace electronic ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within five years of installation.


1. Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:

a. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI)

b. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI)

1620.2 PRODUCTS

1620.2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, interior fluorescent lighting shall be as manufactured by the following, or engineer approved equal.

a. Lithonia

b. RAB Lighting.

1620.2.2 Interior Luminaiires

1. Furnish interior luminaires that comply with requirements specified below, indicated on the Drawings, and as required to meet conditions of installation.

2. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.

3. Metal components shall be formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.

4. Steel parts shall be finished with manufacturer's standard finish applied over a corrosion-resistant primer. Finish shall be free from runs, streaks, stains, holidays or defects.


5. Doors and frames shall be smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating conditions. Relamping shall be possible without the use of tools. Doors, frames, lenses and diffusers shall be designed to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in the operating position.

6. Luminaries shall have minimum reflecting surface reflectance as follows unless specified otherwise on the Drawings:

a. White Surfaces: 85 percent

b. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent

c. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent

7. Lenses, diffusers, covers and globes shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic unless specified otherwise on the Drawings. Lenses shall have 0.125 inches minimum thickness. Lenses for fluorescent troffers shall be injection molded.

8. Luminaires shall conform to UL 1598 - Luminaires. Provide product with damp location listing or wet location listing as required by installation location.

9. Light diffusers, other than those made of metal or glass, used in air-handling light fixtures shall be listed and marked “Fixture Light Diffusers for Air-Handling Fixtures.”

1620.2.3 Lamps

1. Furnish lamps that comply with requirements specified below and the luminaire schedule on the Drawings.

2. Conform to the NEMA C78 standard applicable to each type of lamp.

3. For fluorescent general lighting in interior spaces use T8, T5, or T5HO lamps as indicated on the Drawings with the following characteristics:

Characteristic T8 Lamps T5 Lamps T5HO Lamps

Nominal length: 48 inches 46 inches 46 inches

Actual length (base face to base face):

47.2 inches 45.2 inches 45.2 inches

Base type: Medium bi-pin

Miniature bi-pin

Miniature bi-pin

Initial Light Output (after 100 hours of operation):

2700 - 2850 lumens

2900 - 3050 lumens

5000 lumens


Mean Light Output (at 40 percent of rated life):

2440 - 2710 lumens

2660 - 2900 lumens

4600 - 4740 lumens

Nominal Lamp Efficacy:

87 lumens per watt at 77 °F



Color temperature: 3500 ºK 3500 ºK 4100 ºK

Minimum Average Life (based on 3-hour switching cycle):

20,000 hours 20,000 hours 30,000 hours

Color rendering index (CRI)

75 85 85

Minimum Starting Temperature:

50 °F -4 °F -4 °F

EPA TCLP Compliant: Yes Yes Yes

Ballast Type: Electronic programmed start

Electronic programmed start with end-of-life shutdown.

Electronic programmed start with end-of-life shutdown.

4. All linear fluorescent lamps, shall pass the EPA Toxic Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) test for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1, Procedure for Linear Fluorescent LAML Sample Preparation and TCLP Extraction.

1620.2.4 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

1620.2.4.1 For fluorescent luminaires provide NRTL-listed electronic fluorescent ballasts that have the following characteristics:

1. Conform to UL 935 - Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts and NEMA C82.11 – High Frequency Electronic Lamp Ballasts (ANSI)

2. Ballast protection: Class P

3. Starting method: programmed rapid-start

4. Power factor: at least 95 percent

5. Ballast factor: at least 0.87

6. Crest factor: 1.7 or less


7. Line current total harmonic distortion (THD): less than 15 percent

8. Minimum operating frequency: 40 kHz

9. Sound rating: Class A

10. Minimum starting temperature: 0 degrees F with T5 and T8 lamps

11. Transient voltage protection: ANSI C62.41 location A2

12. EMI/RFI compliance: FCC 47 CFR Part 18, Non-Consumer

13. Ballasts for T5 and T5HO lamps shall have circuitry to shut down the system when lamps reach end-of-life.

1620.2.4.2 For dimmer controlled linear and compact fluorescent luminaires in heated interior spaces (maintained above 60ºF) provide NRTL-listed controllable electronic fluorescent ballasts that have the following characteristics:

1. Conform to UL 935 - Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts and NEMA C82.11 – High Frequency Electronic Lamp Ballasts (ANSI)

2. Ballast protection: Class P

3. Dimming capability range: 100 to 5 percent of light output, flicker-free

4. Starting method: programmed rapid-start at any preset without first having to go to full output

5. Power factor: at least 0.95 at full light output and at least 0.90 over the entire dimming range

6. Ballast factor: at least 0.87 at full output, less than 10 percent at full dim

7. Crest factor: 1.7 or less

8. Line current total harmonic distortion (THD): less than 20 percent over the entire dimming range

9. Minimum operating frequency: Not less than 40 kHz

10. Sound rating: Class A

11. Minimum starting temperature: 60 degrees F.

12. Control voltage: 0 – 10 Vdc

13. Transient voltage protection: ANSI C62.41 location A2

14. EMI/RFI compliance: FCC 47 CFR Part 18, Non-Consumer

15. Ballasts for T5 and T5HO lamps shall have circuitry to shut down the system when lamps reach end-of-life.

1620.2.4.3 Three and four lamp luminaires shall have two ballasts per luminaire for multilevel switching.

1620.2.5 High Intensity discharge Lamp Ballasts

1. HID Lighting Not Included in this Contract.

1620.2.6 Luminaire Accessories

1. Provide stud supports, mounting brackets, frames, plaster rings and other accessories required for luminaire installation.


2. Furnish hangers as specified below and as required by conditions of installation:

a. Stem hangers shall be made of 1/2-inch steel tubing with 45 degrees swivel ball hanger fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish the same as the luminaire.

b. Rod hangers shall be made of 1/4 inch threaded zinc-plated steel rod.

3. Use NRTL-listed T-bar safety clips for lay-in fluorescent luminaires.

4. Where indicated on the Drawings or where lamp breakage is detrimental, provide open fluorescent luminaires with:

a. Self-locking sockets or lamp retainers, two per lamp, and

b. Clear polycarbonate protective lamp sleeves with end caps over each lamp. Sleeve shall have a light transmission of 95 percent and shall be rated for the thermal profile of the lamp and ballast.

1620.3 EXECUTION

1620.3.1 Existing Work – N/A

1620.3.2 Installation

1. Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's installation instructions, approved shop drawings, and the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:


b. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI).

2. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the Project site.

3. Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of the luminaire for wall-mounted fixtures.

4. Where the ceiling forms the protective membrane of a fire resistive assembly, install protective coverings over luminaires in accordance with NRTL requirements.

5. No suspended ceiling fixtures shall be use.

6. Support pendant-mounted or cable-supported luminaires directly from the structure above using a 9 gage wire.

1620.3.3 Lighting Control

1. In spaces 100 square feet and larger luminaries to be controlled with programmable, ‘auto-off’ motion detector switches.

2. Coordinate placement and circuiting of luminaires with daylighting apertures, such as skylights.


1620.3.4 Luminaire Maintenance Marking

1. Each luminaire shall be clearly and permanently marked with a field-applied pressure-sensitive label indicating specific replacement lamps and ballasts. The following information shall be noted in the format “Use Only _______”

a. Lamp diameter code (T5, T5HO, T8, T12), tube configuration (twin tube, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

b. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, B56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, programmed start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.

e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all lamps].

2. Markings shall be located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

3. Pressure-sensitive labels shall be in accordance with UL 969 – Marking and labeling Systems.


1. Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, install lamps, energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver spare parts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:


b. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI)

2. Test electronic dimming ballasts for full range dimming capability.

a. Burn-in dimmer controlled fluorescent lamps at full output for not less than 100 hours before dimming.

b. Check for visually detectable flicker over the full dimming range.

3. Prior to turnover to Las Campanas, replace lamps that were installed and used during construction if more than 15 percent of their rated lamp life has been used.

END OF SECTION


Adobe Power LLC


DISCONNECT SWITCHES

1644.1 GENERAL

1644.1.1 WORK INCLUDED

Disconnect Switches

Enclosures

1644.1.2 SUBMITTALS

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0502 –Submittals.

Product Data: Provide outline dimensions of enclosures and accessories, electrical ratings and fuse sizes.

Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,

1644.2 PRODUCTS

1644.2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

Square D

General Electric

I.T.E. or Approved Equal

1644.2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

Fusible Switch Assemblies: Type HD.

Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Type HD.

Enclosures

Outdoor – NEMA3R

1644.3 EXECUTION

1644.3.1 INSTALLATION

Install disconnect switches where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Install disconnect switches plumb. Do not directly attach disconnect switches to equipment subject to vibration.

Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

1644.3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

Adjust doors and operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

Verify fuse size will provide proper operation and compliance with NEC.

Tighten lugs and bus connections.

Clean interior of disconnect switches.

END OF SECTION


Adobe Power LLC


PANELBOARDS

1647.1 GENERAL

1647.1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Branch-circuit panelboards

1647.1.2 REFERENCES

NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation."

NEMA AB I - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.

NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.

NEMA P13 1 - Panelboards.

NEMA P13 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

1647.1.3 SUBMITTALS

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01336 – Electrical Submittals.

Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.

Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

1647.1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1647.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.

1647.1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.


Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

1647.2 PRODUCTS

1647.2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

Square D General Electric I.T.E.

1647.2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PBI circuit breaker type.

Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide isolated ground bus as indicated on the drawings. Provide neutral bus where required by the utilization voltage. The neutral bus shall be rated at (100) (200) % of the phase bus amps.

Minimum integrated short circuit rating for 240 volt panelboards: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical at 240 volt. Equivalent to Square D NQOD.

Indoor Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

Cabinet Front: Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, and flush lock all keyed alike as indicated on the drawings. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

1647.3 EXECUTION


Examine areas to receive panelboards to assure adequate working clearance for panelboard installation.

Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.

Install panelboards plumb.

Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

Provide typed circuit directory for each panelboard. The directory shall accurately indicate the types of devices served and the rooms in which the devices are located. The rooms and panelboards shall be designated by the actual name or number designated by the Owner. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.

1647.3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

Adjust doors and operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

Tighten lugs and bus connections.

Clean interior of panelboard.

Sand, prime and paint scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION


Adobe Power LLC


SURGE ARRESTORS AND TVSS DEVICES 1652.1 GENERAL

1652.1.1 SUMMARY

1652.1.1.1 Section Includes:

A. Service Entrance Surge Arrestors.

B. Service Entrance/Branch Panel Surge Arrestors.

C. Transient Voltage Surge Arrestors (TVSS).

D. Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV).

1652.1.1.2 The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.

A. In particular the following sections should be used in conjunction with this section:

1. Section 1611 – Grounding.

2. Section 1612 – Wire and Cable.

3. Section 1615 – Wire Connectors and Accessories.

4. Section 1647 – Panelboards.

1652.1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1652.1.2.1 General:

A. The CONTRACTOR, through the use of a qualified System Supplier and ICSC, shall furnish, supervise installation, assemble, and place into service the necessary Surge Arrestors, TVSS and MOV devices as shown on contract drawings.

1652.1.2.2 Scope of Work:

A. The ICSC shall furnish and install the Surge Arrestors, TVSS and MOV.

B. The ICSC shall be responsible for all:

1. Equipment selection and supply.

2. Hardware submittal preparation.

3. Installation.


1652.1.2.3 General Requirements:

A. Surge Arrestors, TVSS and MOV devices shall be in conformance with the following key system criteria:

1. Appropriate for RMS voltage application on which they are installed.

2. Have a minimum rating of NEMA-3R for outdoor applications and NEMA-12 for indoor applications.

1652.1.3 SUBMITTALS

1652.1.3.1 Provide data sheets of all Surge Arrestors, TVSS and MOV for engineering review.

1652.1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1652.1.4.1 All equipment and materials delivered to the job site shall be stored in a location which shall not interfere with the operations of the OWNER’s personnel or interfere with construction.

1652.1.4.2 Storage and handling shall be performed in manners which shall afford maximum protection to the equipment and materials.

1652.1.4.3 It is the System Supplier’s responsibility to assure proper handling and on-site storage.

1652.1.5 WARRANTY

1652.1.5.1 Full manufacturer’s warranty shall be conveyed to site owner at commissioning.

1652.2 PRODUCTS

1652.2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1652.2.1.1 All Surge Arrestor, TVSS and MOV devices shall be new, free from defects, of first quality, and produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products.

1652.2.1.2 Where there is more than on item of similar equipment being furnished under this Contract, all such similar equipment shall be the product of a singular manufacturer.

1652.2.1.3 Acceptable Manufacturers and Type For Surge Arrestor at Booster Station PP1:

A. Leviton #57277-C3S (480-Y)

B. Leviton #32277-DY3 (480-Y)

C. Or Approved Equal.

1652.2.1.4 Acceptable Manufacturers and Type For Surge Arrestor at Booster Station LP and Wells’ Single Phase Branch Circuit Panels:

A. Leviton #32120-1 (240/120 1phase).

B. Square-D #SDSA1175 (240/120 1phase).

C. Square-D #QO2175SB (240/120 1phase).

D. Or Approved Equal.


1652.2.1.5 Acceptable Manufacturers and Type For Surge Arrestors at all Wells’ Service Entrance:

A. Leviton #52240-DM3 (230 – Delta)

B. Leviton #32277-DY3 (230 – Delta)

C. Or Approved Equal

1652.2.1.6 Acceptable manufacturers and Type For MOV devices, used indoors, inside Control Panels or Branch Circuit panels:

A. Littlefuse #V131BA60 (120V)

B. Littlefuse #V251BA60 (240V)

C. Or Approved Equal

1652.2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

1652.2.2.1 Custom built or in-house manufactured Surge Arrestors, TVSS and MOV devices shall not be permitted.

1652.3 EXECUTION

1652.3.1 EXAMINATION

1652.3.1.1 In accordance with Section 1533


1652.3.2.1 Surge Arrestors, TVSS and MOV devices shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommended installation instructions.

1652.3.2.2 Surge Arrestors, TVSS and MOV devices shall be installed at circuit locations shown on the contract drawings.

1652.3.2.3 Surge Arrestors, TVSS and MOV devices shall be permitted to be installed on the secondary of a Main Circuit Breaker of a Panel only where there are no available, spare branch circuit breakers to be used.

1652.3.3 SPARE PARTS

1652.3.3.1 Contractor shall supply one (1) additional surge arrestor, TVSS or MOV module/device for each separate type of device supplied on the project.

1652.3.3.2 Where the Surge arrestor is of the modular type, only the replacement module is to be supplied as a spare part.

END OF SECTION

[Type text]

Specifications: Section 1699 Page 1 of 8

Adobe Power LLC

SPECIFICATION SECTION 1699

FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTING

1699.1 GENERAL


1699.1.1.1 Provide the services of a qualified Electrical Testing Agency (ETA) to perform the functions described below:

1. Acceptance tests, inspections, and system function tests of certain electrical systems, equipment, components, and material installed under the scope of this Project; refer to Part 3 of this Section.

2. System function tests after completion of acceptance tests on certain electrical EQUIPMENTs installed under the scope of this Project.

3. The following power system studies based on the installed electrical EQUIPMENTs:

a. Final short circuit study

b. Final coordination study

c. Arc-flash hazard analysis

d. Load flow analysis study

e. Stability study

f. Harmonic analysis study

1699.1.2 Regulatory Requirements

1699.1.2.1 Make inspections and tests in accordance with the following codes and standards:

1. InterNational Electrical Testing Association - NETA ATS-current edition, Acceptance Testing Specifications (ANSI). NETA ATS forms a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

2. National Fire Protection Association – NFPA

a. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code (ANSI) (NEC)

b. NFPA 70B: Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance (ANSI)

c. NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace (ANSI).

3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers - IEEE

a. IEEE Std 242: IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

b. IEEE Std 399: IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis

[Type text]


c. IEEE Std 1584: IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations


1699.1.3.1 The ETA shall be an independent testing organization which shall function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of the equipment or systems to be evaluated.

1699.1.3.2 The ETA shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment devices, installations, and systems.

1699.1.3.3 The ETA shall have a documented quality assurance program, documented inspection and test and procedures, and a documented electrical safety program.

1699.1.3.4 The ETA shall have successfully completed not less than five acceptance testing, inspection and calibration projects of similar scope to this project.

1699.1.3.5 The ETA shall have a calibration program, and test instruments used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS.

1699.1.3.6 Each ETA technician performing testing, inspection, calibration, and adjustments shall be a “qualified person” as defined by NFPA 70E and the NEC.

1. Technicians performing these electrical tests and inspections shall be trained and experienced concerning the apparatus and systems being evaluated.

2. Technicians shall be capable of conducting the tests in a safe manner with complete knowledge of the hazards involved and the appropriate safety-related work practices.

3. Technicians shall be qualified to evaluate the test data and make a judgment on the serviceability of the specific equipment.

1699.1.3.7 Testing, inspection, calibration, and adjustments shall be performed or supervised on the Project site by an ETA employee.

1699.1.4 Submittals

1699.1.4.1 Submit the following:

1. Certifications: Submit name and qualifications of the ETA.

2. Certifications: Submit quality assurance program of the ETA.

3. Certifications: Submit instrument calibration program of the ETA.

4. Certifications: Submit electrical safety program of the ETA.

5. Certifications: Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineer or engineering technician performing the required testing services. Include a list of three comparable jobs performed by the individual with specific names and telephone numbers for reference.

6. Test Plans: Submit acceptance and system functions test plan for each item of equipment or system to be field tested at least 45 days prior to planned testing date. Include applicable procedures, forms, and lists of

[Type text]


test equipment. Do not perform testing until test plan and procedures have been approved.

7. Test Reports: Submit certified copies of inspection reports, test reports, and system function tests. Reports shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements including test instrument calibration, identification of deficiencies, and recommendation of corrective action when appropriate. Type and neatly bind test reports to form a part of the final record. Submit test report not more than 10 days after each test is completed.

8. Calculations: Submit certified copies of power system studies listed below. Calculations shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements, identify deficiencies, and recommend corrective action when appropriate. Type and neatly bind Calculations to form a part of the final record. Submit power system studies in paper format and also in electronic format transmitted on a CD-ROM.

a. Final short circuit study

b. Final coordination study

c. Arc-flash hazard analysis

d. Load flow study

e. Stability study

f. Harmonic analysis

1699.1.5 Coordination

1699.1.5.1 Schedule the project to allow adequate time for electrical acceptance testing BEFORE equipment or system is energized.

1. Notify the ETA when equipment becomes available for acceptance inspections and tests.

2. Coordinate work to expedite inspections and tests.

1699.2 PRODUCTS

1699.2.1 Not Applicable

1699.3 EXECUTION

1699.3.1 General

1699.3.1.1 Perform the installation insulation-resistance, continuity, and rotation tests for electrical EQUIPMENTs described in each Section of these Specifications before, and in addition to, tests performed by the ETA that are specified in this Section.

1699.3.1.2 Supply suitable and stable electrical power, adequate lighting, and heating or ventilation as required at each test site for the ETA to perform the specified acceptance testing.

1699.3.1.3 Short Circuit, and protective device coordination studies shall be performed o nationally recognized computer software such as SKM System Analysis, EDSA, ETAP, or approved equal.

[Type text]


1699.3.1.4 Supply one set of the following to ETA prior to the performance of any final testing:

1. Preliminary short-circuit analysis

2. Preliminary coordination study and protective device setting table

3. Complete set of electrical Drawings, Specifications, and any pertinent Change Orders

4. Approved construction submittal documents for material and equipment

5. Site specific hazard notification and safety training.

6. Other information necessary for a safe and accurate test and inspection of the system.

1699.3.2 Inspection and Test Procedures

1. The ETA shall perform the acceptance tests and inspections.

2. The ETA shall use test methods, follow procedures, and evaluate test values in accordance with the applicable sections of the NETA ATS, the manufacturer's recommendations, and each applicable specification section.

3. Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are not required unless specified.

4. Place equipment in service only after completion of required tests and evaluation of the test results.

5. The ETA shall perform acceptance tests and inspections on electrical EQUIPMENTs as identified in the following paragraphs.

[Type text]


.TABLE 1 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

•

Conductor Type/Size/Rating

Inspection or Test per NETA ATS Se

rvic

e Fe

eder

B

ranc

h ≥6

AW

G

Bra

nch

<6 A

WG

C

ontro

l ≥ 1

20V

Compare conductor data with drawings and specifications. X X X X X

Inspect for physical damage and correct connections. X X X X X Inspect connections for high resistance. X X X X X Inspect compression applied connections for correct cable match and indentation. X X X X X

Inspect for correct identification and arrangements. X X X X X Inspect jacket insulation. X X X X X Test connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter. X X X X X

Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor to ground and other conductors. X X X X X

Perform continuity tests to insure correct connections. X X X X X

Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors. X X X

[Type text]


TABLE 2 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Type/Size Inspection or Test per NETA ATS M

ain

C/B

Feed

er C

/B

Bra

nch

Circ

uit C

/B

Compare nameplate data with drawings and specifications X X X

Inspect physical and mechanical condition. X X X Inspect anchorage and alignment. X X X Verify the unit is clean. X X X Operate the circuit breaker to assure smooth operation. X X X

Inspect connections for high resistance. X X X Inspect compression applied connections for correct cable match and indentation. X X X

Measure resistance through connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. X X X

Measure insulation-resistance on each pole phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with the circuit breaker closed and across each open pole.

X X X

Measure contact/pole resistance. X X X Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring, X X X

Perform adjustments for final setting in accordance with coordination study. X X X

Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. X X X

Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. X X

Determine ground fault pickup and delay by primary current injection. X X X

Determine instantaneous pickup by primary current injection. X X X

Verify correct operation of auxiliary functions. X X X

[Type text]


1699.3.3 System Function Tests

1699.3.3.1 The ETA shall develop and perform system function tests on the following EQUIPMENTs in accordance with NETA ATS after completion of the inspection and test procedures described above.

1. Low-Voltage Switchgear

a. Verify proper function of key interlock systems.

b. Verify proper function of main-tie-main automatic throw-over system,

c. Verify proper operation of zone-selective interlock system.

d. Verify proper operation of arc-flash reduction maintenance switch.

e. Verify proper operation of internal communications network.

f. Verify proper operation of interfaces with building automation system.

2. Switchboards

a. Verify proper operation of zone-selective interlock system.

b. Verify proper operation of arc-flash reduction maintenance switch.

c. Verify proper operation of interfaces with building automation system.

3. Panelboards

a. Verify proper operation of interlock and shunt trip systems.

4. Motor Control Centers

a. Verify proper operation of interfaces with building automation system.

b. Verify proper operation of interlock systems.

5. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

a. Verify proper operation of interlock and shunt trip systems.

6. Enclosed Controllers



7. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)



c. Verify proper operation of external maintenance bypass system.

1699.3.4 Thermographic Survey

1. After the facility has been occupied and operated for 6 months, the ETA shall perform system thermographic survey of current-carrying devices rated 800 amperes and greater in accordance with NETA ATS.

[Type text]


2. Conduct thermographic survey with circuits and devices operating within 20 percent of the design load. Provide additional circuit loads as required if building loads are inadequate to obtain required circuit loading.

1699.3.5 Test Report

1699.3.5.1 The ETA shall include the following information in the final test report:

1. Summary of project.

2. Description of equipment inspected and tested.

3. Description of inspections and tests.

4. Data record resulting from each inspection and test.

5. Results of system function tests.

6. Power system studies.

7. Analysis of the tests, identification of deficiencies, and recommendations for corrective action.

1699.3.5.2 Include the following minimum information in each data record:

1. Identification of the ETA.

2. Equipment identification: Equipment ID code based on Drawings and including TA number, building number, and system identifier.

3. Humidity, temperature, and other conditions that may affect the results of the tests or calibration of test equipment.

4. Date inspection, test, or function test was performed.

5. Identification and signature of the testing technician.

6. Description of inspections, tests, maintenance, and function tests performed and recorded.

7. Test equipment used and references to calibration records.

8. Indication of as-found condition and as-left results.

1699.3.5.3 Submit six copies of the complete report to the Engineer.


1. The ETA shall retest any EQUIPMENT or construction that did not pass acceptance tests or inspections.

END OF SECTION